毗兰若篇的解释巴利
Verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā
“Seyyathidaṃ”的意思是:那是什么,或者那是怎样的。“非限定指示语”是指不先限定自身含义再作指示;限定指示才是先限定自身含义再作指示,非限定指示就是不是限定指示。通过这个词所说的,就叫做“语词”,所以叫“非限定指示语”。“它的”就是指“因此”这个词。“思虑”是指“哪些佛陀、世尊的梵行未能久住呢?”等等(《波罗夷》18)中生起的想法。“在前或在后”的意思是:在“因此”这个词之前已说的文句中,或在之后将要说的文句中。“以义理成就”是指依其能力而成就。这里只是展示一个入门示例:为了阐明前面所说的理趣,这不过是方法上的举例说明。因为“面”“门”“方便”,在意义上其实是同一个。巴利
Seyyathidanti taṃ katamaṃ, taṃ kathanti vā attho. Aniyamaniddesavacananti attano atthaṃ sarūpena niyametvā niddisatīti niyamaniddeso, na niyamaniddeso aniyamaniddeso. Sova vuccate anenāti vacananti aniyamaniddesavacanaṃ. Tassāti tenātipadassa. Parivitakkoti ‘‘katamesānaṃ kho buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ brahmacariyaṃ na ciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosī’’tiādinā (pārā. 18) pavatto. Pubbe vā pacchā vāti tenātipadato heṭṭhā vuttapāṭhe vā upari vakkhamānapāṭhe vāti attho. Atthato siddhenāti sāmatthiyato siddhena. Tatridaṃ mukhamattanidassananti tassā yathāvuttayuttiyā paridīpane idaṃ upāyamattanidassanaṃ. Mukhaṃ dvāraṃ upāyoti hi atthato ekaṃ.
“samaya”这个词出现,就是关联。它的意思是:samaya 这个词有“会合”的意思,这就是关联。缘于时间和时机:这里,时间是指适合前往的适当时候,时机是指身体体力等诸因缘的和合,缘于、依于这些,就是这个意思。刹那是指机会。因为佛出世等,正是道与梵行的机会。那本身就是时机。因此才说“唯一”。大集会就是大聚集。在林中就是在树林里。跋陀利,那时机也确实……:这里,时机是指违犯学处的因由。那是什么?是自己邪行而被世尊知道,那被称为时机的因由,是他所未通达的,就是这个意思。世尊等语,是显示他通达的方式。受持者,是因为能够受持某些东西而受持,这是须摩那游方者的名字。在此宣说时机、见解之处:“宣说时机者”,是末利迦园。那本身因为被名为帝利迦衣的林列所围绕,所以称为“帝利迦衣”,又因为那里只有一座住所堂,所以称为“一讲堂”。义通达,是因为获得如上所说的现世与来世的利益、饶益。慢通达,是因为断慢。逼恼义,就是逼恼,即对具有那者加以伤害,使之不能伸展,逼恼本身就是义,就是逼恼义。热恼,是以苦苦性等方式的热恼。变异,是以老与死两种方式的可变异,应被通达、应被证悟,这就是通达,那本身就是通达义,即逼恼等。巴利
Samayasaddo dissatīti sambandho. Assāti samayasaddassa samavāyo atthoti sambandho. Kālañca samayañca upādāyāti ettha kālo nāma upasaṅkamanassa yuttakālo, samayo nāma sarīrabalādikāraṇasamavāyo, te upādāya paṭiccāti attho. Khaṇoti okāso. Buddhuppādādayo hi maggabrahmacariyassa okāso. So eva samayo. Teneva ‘‘ekovā’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahāsamayoti mahāsamūho. Pavanasminti vanasaṇḍe. Samayopi kho te bhaddālīti ettha samayoti sikkhāpadāvilaṅghanassa hetu, ko so? Attano vippaṭipattiyā bhagavato jānanaṃ, so samayasaṅkhāto hetu tassā appaṭividdhoti attho. Bhagavātiādi tassa paṭivijjhanākāradassanaṃ. Uggahamānoti kiñci kiñci uggahetuṃ samatthatāya uggahamāno, sumanaparibbājakassevetaṃ nāmaṃ. Samayaṃ diṭṭhiṃ pavadanti etthāti samayappavādako, mallikāya ārāmo. Sveva tindukācīrasaṅkhātāya timbarurukkhapantiyā parikkhittattā ‘‘tindukācīra’’nti ca, ekāva nivāsā sālā etthāti ‘‘ekasālako’’ti ca vuccati. Atthābhisamayāti yathāvuttassa diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikassa atthassa hitassa paṭilābhato. Mānābhisamayāti mānappahānā. Pīḷanaṭṭhoti pīḷanaṃ taṃsamaṅgino hiṃsanaṃ, avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ, pīḷanameva attho pīḷanaṭṭho . Santāpoti dukkhadukkhatādivasena santāpanaṃ. Vipariṇāmoti jarāya maraṇena cāti dvidhā vipariṇāmetabbatā abhisametabbo paṭivijjhitabboti abhisamayo, sova abhisamayaṭṭho, pīḷanādīni.
在这里,由于前缀只是起到标明的作用,所以在解释 samaya 这个词的含义时,也把带有前缀的 abhisamaya 这个词收了进来。其中:
以“会合”的意思来说,诸缘共同产生果、一起运作,这就是 paṭi ayanaṃ ekato pavatti,因此叫 samaya,也就是“会合”。
当作为还灭的亲依止的会合存在时,众生在这里前往、运作,所以叫 samaya,也就是“刹那”。
有为法在这里会合,或者它自己前来又离去,所以叫 samaya,也就是“时间”。
各部分在这里和合,或者它自己与它们和合,所以叫 samaya,也就是“聚集”。
当有其他缘的会合时,果从那里产生,所以叫 samaya,也就是“因”。
由于想颠倒,心对诸法执取、固着,所以叫 samaya,也就是“邪见”。
接近而前往、靠近,叫 samaya,也就是“获得”。
正确和合之语的离去,叫 samaya,也就是“断除”。
正确和合之真理的行与了知,叫 samaya,也就是“通达”。
应当这样了知 samaya 一词在各种含义中的用法。巴利
Ettha ca upasaggānaṃ jotakamattattā samayasaddassa atthuddhārepi saupasaggo abhisamayasaddo uddhaṭo. Tattha saṅgamavasena paccayānaṃ phaluppādanaṃ paṭi ayanaṃ ekato pavatti etthāti samayo, samavāyo. Vivaṭṭūpanissayasaṅgame sati enti ettha sattā pavattantīti samayo, khaṇo. Sameti ettha saṅkhatadhammo, sayaṃ vā eti āgacchati vigacchati cāti samayo, kālo. Samenti avayavā etasmiṃ, sayaṃ vā tesūti samayo, samūho. Paccayantarasaṅgame eti āgacchati etasmā phalanti samayo, hetu. Saññāvasena vipallāsato dhammesu eti abhinivisatīti samayo, diṭṭhi. Samīpaṃ ayanaṃ upagamanaṃ samayo, paṭilābho. Sammadeva sahitānaṃ vācānaṃ ayanaṃ vigamoti samayo, pahānaṃ. Sammadeva, sahitānaṃ vā saccānaṃ ayanaṃ jānananti samayo, paṭivedho. Evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe samayasaddassa pavatti veditabbā.
在这里,samaya 这个词按通义来说有多种含义。因为一个词在某个特定含义上使用时,并不会同时用在其他含义上。所以,就像各种含义本身不同一样,表达那些含义的 samaya 一词也各不相同,应当这样理解。在一切处提取含义时,都应如此。巴利
Ettha ca samayasaddassa sāmaññena anekatthatā vuttā. Na hi ekasmiṃ atthavisese vattamāno saddo tadaññepi vattati. Tasmā atthā viya taṃtaṃvācakā samayasaddāpi bhinnā evāti gahetabbā. Evaṃ sabbattha atthuddhāresu.
在这里,“如此”是用依格和业格的表达方式,指那些经藏与阿毗达摩中的内容。“在此”是指在律藏中,“否则”是用作格来说的。“绝对地”就是无有间断。所谓“性”,就是作用;用作用来表征另一种作用,就是“以性表征性”,比如月亮升起时,说“王子出生了”。关于“因为所依……”等:在阿毗达摩中,samaya 这个词适用于五种意义——时间、聚集、刹那、会合、因,不像在律藏中只用于时间。其中,时间和聚集这两种意义,适合以所依的方式来说明那里所说的触等诸法。而刹那、会合、因这三种意义,则适合以它们自身作为性来表征触等诸法之性的方式来说明。这是通过阐明的方式,来论证前面所说的含义。其中,在某个时间,或某个法聚作为所依时,善生起;就在那同一时间,或同一法聚中,触等存在。这是按“所依”义的解释。而在某个刹那,或会合,或因作为性而存在时,善生起;就在那同一刹那等作为性而存在时,触等存在。这是按“以性表征性”义的解释。应当这样理解。巴利
Tattha tathāti tesu suttābhidhammesu upayogabhummavacanehi. Idhāti vinaye, aññathāti karaṇavacanena. Accantamevāti nirantarameva. Bhāvo nāma kiriyā, kiriyāya kiriyantarūpalakkhaṇaṃ bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ, yathā udaye sati cande jāto rājaputtoti. Adhikaraṇañhītiādi abhidhamme samayasaddo kālasamūhakhaṇasamavāyahetusaṅkhātesu pañcasu atthesu vattati, na vinaye viya kāle eva, tesu ca kālasamūhatthā dve tattha vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ adhikaraṇabhāvena niddisituṃ yuttā. Khaṇasamavāyahetuatthā pana tayopi attano bhāvena phassādīnaṃ bhāvassa upalakkhaṇabhāvena niddisituṃ yuttāti vibhāvanamukhena yathāvuttamatthaṃ samatthetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha yasmiñhi kāle, dhammasamūhe vā samaye adhikaraṇabhūte kusalaṃ uppannaṃ, tasmiññeva kāle, dhammasamūhe vā samaye phassādayo hontīti evaṃ adhikaraṇatthayojanā, yasmiṃ pana khaṇe, samavāye hetumhi vā samaye sati vijjamāne kusalaṃ uppannaṃ, tasmiññeva khaṇādimhi samayepi vijjamāne phassādayo hontīti bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇatthayojanā ca veditabbā.
在这里,“有”是指一首摄颂,它涵盖了前面所说的意义范围。“除了”是指在经藏和阿毗达摩中。“仅是言说上的差别”是指:只是根据说法方式的差异而有言辞上的不同,并不是意义上的差别。巴利
Hoticetthāti ettha yathāvuttaatthavisaye saṅgahagāthā hoti. Aññatrāti suttābhidhammesu. Abhilāpamattabhedoti desanāvilāsato saddamatteneva bhedo, na atthato.
“无差别”是指共通性而言。在“威仪路”等说法里,“路”是指通过一切根门而活动的运作处;由于没有脱离这个活动而另外存在的业,所以站立等就是威仪路,也就是住处。成为梵天者、成为最胜者,因为是以利他之心等而运作,所以慈等称为梵住。而其余那些广大的住法,由于以去除一切盖障等所成就的光明等意义,称为天住。因为慈等已经单独被归入梵住,所以这里没有把它们包括进来。只有圣者的住处,也就是果等至,称为圣住。巴利
Avisesenāti sāmaññena. Iriyāpathotiādīsu iriyāya sabbadvārikakiriyāya patho pavattanaṭṭhānaṃ tabbinimuttakammassa abhāvāti ṭhānādayo iriyāpatho, sova vihāro. Brahmabhūtā seṭṭhabhūtā parahitacittādivasappavattito mettādayo brahmavihāro nāma. Tadavasesā pana mahaggatā sabbanīvaraṇavigamanādisiddhena jotanādiatthena dibbavihāro nāma. Brahmavihārabhāvena visuṃ gahitattā mettādayo idha asaṅgahitā. Ariyānameva vihāroti phalasamāpattiyo ariyavihāro nāma.
为了说明“根”这个词在“树下”等语中就是惯用义,又用另一个“根”字来限定,所以说“根根”,就像说“苦苦”一样(参见《分别论注》190)。因为贪等法与嗔根等心不共通,所以说“在不共因中”。巴利
Rukkhādimūleyeva mūlasaddassa niruḷhabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ aparena mūlasaddena visesetvā ‘‘mūlamūle’’ti vuttaṃ, yathā dukkhadukkhanti (vibha. aṭṭha. 190). Lobhādīnaṃ dosamūlādicittāsādhāraṇattā ‘‘asādhāraṇahetumhī’’ti vuttaṃ.
这里,“可能有”的意思是:在“韦朗加人”等段落里,也许会有某个人提出责难。“他的”则是指世尊的。那么,用两种方式叙述因缘,到底有什么作用呢?回答说:是为了显示行境的村落等。巴利
Tattha siyāti tattha verañjāyantiādīsu padesu kassaci codanā siyāti attho. Ubhayathā nidānakittanassa pana kiṃ payojananti? Āha gocaragāmanidassanatthantiādi. Tattha assāti bhagavato.
疲劳就是疲倦;对自己身体的疲倦,是自我疲倦;对它一再地投入、反复地转起,就是自我疲倦的投入。由于与所依的欲乐对象之乐相结合而沉溺、投入,这是欲爱;它伴随着那些欲乐,或者沉溺于作为对象的乐而转起,所以称为沉溺欲乐之爱;对它一再地投入,就是沉溺欲乐的投入——在世间随物欲增长的状态。当它生起时,确实只是为了利益大众等目的而生起,这就是其中的连结。巴利
Kilamova kilamatho, attano attabhāvassa kilamatho attakilamatho, tassa anu anu yogo punappunaṃ pavattanaṃ attakilamathānuyogo. Vatthukāmārammaṇe sukhe sampayogavasena līnā yuttā, kāmataṇhā , taṃsahacarite kāme sukhe vā ārammaṇabhūte allīnā pavattatīti kāmasukhallikā taṇhā, tassā kāmasukhallikāya anu anu yogo kāmasukhallikānuyogo. Loke saṃvaḍḍhabhāvanti āmisopabhogena saṃvaḍḍhitabhāvaṃ. Uppajjamāno bahujanahitādiatthāyeva uppajjatīti yojanā.
为了说明“以见和戒的共同性而和合,所以叫僧团”这个意思,论师说了“见”等话。这里说的“见”,就是经里讲的:“这种见是圣的、能引导人出离的,能让实践它的人正确地灭尽苦,安住在这样一类见的共同性中。”这里说的“戒”,就是经里讲的:“那些戒没有破损……乃至……能导向定,安住在这样一类戒的共同性中。”由这种叫做共同性的和合、聚集,成为沙门团体,就是这个意思。或者,这里应该读作“以见戒共同性的聚集、和合”,意思是:由见和戒的共同性所形成的和合而聚集起来的沙门团体。因为这样读的话,从字面上讲更合理。“他的”,指的是大比丘僧团的。巴利
Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatattā saṅghoti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento āha diṭṭhītiādi. Ettha ca ‘‘yāyaṃ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54; a. ni. 6.12; pari. 274) evaṃ vuttāya diṭṭhiyā. ‘‘Yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni…pe… samādhisaṃvattanikāni, tathārūpesu sīlesu sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54; a. ni. 6.12; pari. 274) evaṃ vuttānañca sīlānaṃ sāmaññasaṅkhātena saṅghāto saṅghaṭito samaṇagaṇo, tenāti attho. ‘‘Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññasaṅghātasaṅghātenā’’ti vā pāṭhenettha bhavitabbaṃ, tassa diṭṭhisīlasāmaññabhūtena saṃhananena saṅghāto samaṇagaṇo, tenāti attho. Evañhi pāṭhe saddato attho yuttataro hoti. Assāti mahato bhikkhusaṅghassa.
“梵行”这个词里,“梵”指的是吠陀。吠陀按密咒梵行和仪轨梵行等分为三种。其中,梨俱吠陀等三部吠陀是密咒,是根本;其余那些则是附属的。所以这里只取根本的来说。“诵习咒语”,意思就是诵习梨俱吠陀等密咒典籍。梨俱吠陀等之所以被称为“咒语”,是因为它们应当秘密诵持。为了用两个例子说明前面所说的两层含义——“已除诸恶故为婆罗门”“已息诸恶故为沙门”——才说了“因为……”等话。也就是说,取了“因为已息诸恶,所以称为沙门”这句话,而说“以已息诸恶故,称为沙门”;至于“已除诸恶”,那是另一首偈颂里说的。“如实通达功德”,指如实通达的功德;“有所执著”,指有过失。巴利
Brahmaṃ aṇatīti ettha brahma-saddena vedo vuccati, so mantabrahmakappavasena tividho. Tattha iruvedādayo tayo vedā mantā, te ca padhānā, itare pana sannissitā, tena padhānasseva gahaṇaṃ. Mante sajjhāyatīti iruvedādike mantasatthe sajjhāyatīti attho. Iruvedādayo hi guttabhāsitabbatāya ‘‘mantā’’ti vuccanti. ‘‘Bāhitapāpattā brāhmaṇo, samitapāpattā samaṇo’’ti yathāvuttamatthadvayaṃ udāharaṇadvayena vibhāvetuṃ vuttañhetantiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Samitattā hi pāpānaṃ ‘samaṇo’ti pavuccatī’’ti hi idaṃ vacanaṃ gahetvā ‘‘samitapāpattā ‘samaṇo’ti vuccatī’’ti vuttaṃ, bāhitapāpoti idaṃ pana aññasmiṃ gāthābandhe vuttavacanaṃ. Yathābhuccaguṇādhigatanti yathābhūtaguṇādhigataṃ. Sakiñcanoti sadoso.
“以族姓故”这句话里,“守护者”就叫族姓;而这里的“牛”这个字,也表示名称和智慧。“以某种衰损”是指因为亲族衰损等某种衰损,意思是衰退。“从彼以后”就是“韦朗加人”等说法。“于如是情状陈述之义中用业格”是说:成为这样、这种样子,就叫“如是情状”;对它的陈述,就叫“如是情状之陈述”,这个意思就是“如是情状陈述义”。或者,“已成为、已生为如此这般的状态”这种说法的意思,就是“如是情状陈述义”,在这个意思上用业格,这就是它的含义。这里“高起”中的“abhi”这个词,因为显示“凌越而上起”的样子,所以是表明“如是情状陈述义”的词。由于和它相连,所以“彼尊乔达摩”这个业格语,虽然本身是属格的意思,但为了表明“如是情状陈述”,就说“于如是情状陈述义中”;正因如此,才说“意思是彼尊乔达摩”。巴利
Gottavasenāti ettha gaṃ tāyatīti gottaṃ, go-saddena cettha abhidhānaṃ buddhi ca vuccati. Kenaci pārijuññenāti ñātipārijuññādinā kenaci pārijuññena , parihāniyāti attho. Tato paranti verañjāyantiādivacanaṃ. Itthambhūtākhyānatthe upayogavacananti itthaṃ imaṃ pakāraṃ bhūto āpannoti itthambhūto, tassa ākhyānaṃ itthambhūtākhyānaṃ, soyevattho itthambhūtākhyānattho. Atha vā ‘‘itthaṃ evaṃpakāro bhūto jāto’’ti evaṃ kathanattho itthambhūtākhyānattho, tasmiṃ upayogavacananti attho. Ettha ca abbhuggatoti ettha abhi-saddo itthambhūtākhyānatthajotako abhibhavitvā uggamanappakārassa dīpanato, tena yogato taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotamanti idaṃ upayogavacanaṃ sāmiatthepi samāne itthambhūtākhyānadīpanato ‘‘itthambhūtākhyānatthe’’ti vuttaṃ, tenevāha ‘‘tassa kho pana bhoto gotamassāti attho’’ti.
这里说的是:就像“善哉,提婆达多对母亲(行善)”这句话,因为和前缀 abhi 连用,在表达“如此状态”时用了业格;同样,这里“那位乔达摩尊者,有这样美好的称誉声传扬开来”,也是因为和前缀 abhi 连用,在表达“如此状态”时用了业格。因为在“善哉,提婆达多对母亲(行善)”这句话里,本来可以是“提婆达多在母亲这件事上,或者与母亲有关,是好的”,也就是说,本该用处格或属格;但因为和表示“如此状态”的 abhi 连用,就改成了业格。正如在这句话里,可以理解成“提婆达多在母亲这件事上、与母亲有关,达到了所说的那种状态”;同样,这里也可以理解成“与乔达摩尊者有关的称誉声,压过一切而传扬开来,达到了上升的状态”。其中,那边拿“提婆达多”来说,就像这里拿“称誉声”来说;那边说的“母亲”,就像这里说的“那位乔达摩尊者”;那边拿“善哉”来说,就像这里拿“传扬开来”来说,应当这样理解。“称誉声”就是“成为称誉的声音”;为了说明不只是这样,所以特别限定说“只是称誉”。由此,称誉就是赞叹;把宣扬它的声音叫作“称誉声”,为了说明这一点,所以说“或者说是赞叹之声”。巴利
Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā sādhu devadatto mātaramabhīti ettha abhisaddayogato itthambhūtākhyāne upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ, evamidhāpi taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ abhi evaṃ kalyāṇo kittisaddo uggatoti abhisaddayogato itthambhūtākhyāne upayogavacananti. Sādhu devadatto mātaramabhīti ettha hi ‘‘devadatto mātaramabhi mātari visaye mātuyā vā sādhū’’ti evaṃ adhikaraṇatthe vā sāmiatthe vā bhummavacanassa sāmivacanassa vā pasaṅge itthambhūtākhyānatthajotakena abhisaddena yoge upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ, yathā cettha devadatto mātuvisaye mātusambandhī vā so vuttappakārappattoti ayamattho viññāyati, evamidhāpi bhoto gotamassa sambandhī kittisaddo abbhuggato abhibhavitvā uggamanapakārappattoti ayamattho viññāyati. Tattha hi devadattaggahaṇaṃ viya idha kittisaddaggahaṇaṃ, tattha mātaranti vacanaṃ viya idha taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotamanti vacanaṃ, tattha sādhusaddaggahaṇaṃ viya idha uggatasaddaggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Kittisaddoti kittibhūto saddo, na kevaloti dassanatthaṃ visesitanti āha ‘‘kitti evā’’ti. Tato kittīti thuti, tassā pakāsako saddo kittisaddoti dassetuṃ ‘‘thutighoso vā’’ti vuttaṃ.
这里说“那位世尊”时,“那位”是指大家都熟知的那个人:他圆满了三十种波罗蜜,摧毁了一切烦恼,震动了一万世界,证得了无上正等正觉,在世间极其出名,所以就说“那位世尊”。而“世尊”这个词,在这里是在称呼导师的名号,不是在称颂他的功德。但在后面其他地方,“世尊”就是用来称颂功德的。“由于这些和这些”——这句话是在说明,阿拉汉等每一个词,都是依据各自不同的众多功德聚集而使用的。巴利
So bhagavāti ettha soti pasiddhiyaṃ, yo so samattiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbakilese bhañjitvā dasasahassilokadhātuṃ kampento anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, so loke atipākaṭoti ‘‘so bhagavā’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhagavāti ca idaṃ satthu nāmakittanaṃ, na guṇakittanaṃ. Parato pana bhagavāti guṇakittanameva. Iminā ca iminā cāti etena arahantiādipadānaṃ paccekaṃ anekaguṇagaṇaṃ paṭicca pavattabhāvaṃ dasseti.
“极远又极远”:用两个词来表示极其遥远,因为极远本身就是远。“连同习气一起摧灭了诸烦恼”:这句话说明世尊的阿拉汉果与独觉佛等是不共的,因为他们没有断除习气。所谓习气,就是即使已经没有烦恼,却因为未能通达一切所知境等原因,导致身口意三门的运作有所欠缺的那种状态——就像长久戴着脚镣的人,即使脚镣已经解开,走路时仍会因为习惯性的蜷缩而受到障碍,这就是被脚镣所留下的状态。毕陵伽婆蹉等人有“贱民”之类的称呼,这应当被理解为习气。在此“ārakā”一词中,考虑到“ākāra”的短音以及“ka”音变为“ha”音,依照词源学的方式,应当理解“arahaṃ”一词的成立。同样,在下文中也应当依照适当的方式以词源学理解词的成立。“这轮回之轮”:这是连接。“福等”:以“等”字摄非福行与不动行。诸漏因为是无明等的因,所以是集,因此说“以漏集所成”。“漏集故无明集”这是所说的。异熟、所作、色法的分别,三有本身就是车,在那三有之车上。“轮回之轮”:如上所说的烦恼、业、异熟的集起。巴利
Suvidūravidūreti dvīhi saddehi ativiya dūreti dasseti, suvidūratā eva hi vidūratā. Savāsanānaṃ kilesānaṃ viddhaṃsitattāti iminā paccekabuddhādīhi asādhāraṇaṃ bhagavato arahattanti dasseti tesaṃ vāsanāya appahīnattā, vāsanā ca nāma nikkilesassāpi sakalañeyyānavabodhādidvārattayappayogaviguṇatāhetubhūto kilesanihito ākāro ciranigaḷitapādānaṃ nigaḷamokkhepi saṅkucitatāgamanahetuko nigaḷanihito ākāro viya. Yāya pilindavacchādīnaṃ vasalavohārādiviguṇatā hoti, ayaṃ vāsanāti gahetabbā. Ārakāti ettha ākārassa rassattaṃ ka-kārassa ca ha-kāraṃ sānussaraṃ katvā niruttinayena ‘‘araha’’nti padasiddhi veditabbā. Evaṃ uparipi yathārahaṃ niruttinayena padasiddhi veditabbā. Yañcetaṃ saṃsāracakkanti sambandho. Puññādīti ādi-saddena apuññābhisaṅkhāraāneñjābhisaṅkhāre saṅgaṇhāti. Āsavā eva avijjādīnaṃ kāraṇattā samudayoti āha ‘‘āsavasamudayamayenā’’ti. ‘‘Āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.103) hi vuttaṃ. Vipākakaṭattārūpappabhedo tibhavo eva ratho, tasmiṃ tibhavarathe. Saṃsāracakkanti yathāvuttakilesakammavipākasamudayo.
诸蕴的次第,以及界与处;
持续不断流转的,就叫做“轮回”。巴利
‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, ‘saṃsāro’ti pavuccatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 2.618; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.95 apasādanāvaṇṇanā; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.60; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.199; dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā; vibha. aṭṭha. 226 saṅkhārapadaniddesa; su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.523; udā. aṭṭha. 39; itivu. aṭṭha. 14, 58; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.67, 99; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 58; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.117; cūḷani. aṭṭha. 6) –
像这样说的时候,“轮回”之所以叫“轮”,是因为它像车轮一样不停地旋转;这个轮子的所有辐条都已被斩断——这就是句与句之间的关联。“由彼”指的是由世尊。“觉”就是智,这个智在这里成为清净明净的核心,所以叫“觉坛”。“尽业之智锋”说的是阿拉汉道智,为了表明它能斩断应当被斩断的、名为“行”的业,所以要知道这是用“尽业”这个特征来修饰它而说的。巴利
Evaṃ vutto saṃsārova cakkaṃ viya paribbhamanato cakkaṃ, tassa cakkassa sabbe arā hatāti sambandho. Anenāti bhagavatā. Bodhīti ñāṇaṃ, taṃ ettha maṇḍaṃ pasannaṃ jātanti bodhimaṇḍo. Kammakkhayakaraṃ ñāṇapharasunti arahattamaggañāṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ chinditabbaṃ abhisaṅkhārasaṅkhātaṃ kammaṃ paricchindatīti dassetuṃ kammakkhayakaravisesanavisiṭṭhaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
像这样,先用几个支分说明了轮回之轮,再用其余支分——也就是作为果报的名色法——说明了三有之车,并说明了在这辆车上,轮回之轮的辐条是怎样被斩断的。现在,为了说明仅仅由全部十二缘起支构成、完全不带车喻的纯粹轮回之轮,以及斩断其辐条的种种不同方式,所以说了“或”等话。其中,“无始”就是随顺无始,意思是:无论怎样一路追溯,都找不到可知的起点。说“以无明为根本、以老死为终点”,这是把行等十支按辐条的意义合并成一个整体来说的。因为在缘起经文里,并没有说它们各各都以无明为根本、以老死为终点。或者也可以这样理解:它们各各按各自的意义来说,也有以无明为根本,并以各自那种作为自相的刹那老死为终点。这样,它们各各作为辐条也就成立了。巴利
Evaṃ katipayaṅgehi saṃsāracakkaṃ tadavasesaṅgehi phalabhūtanāmarūpadhammehi tibhavarathañca tasmiṃ rathe yojitasaṃsāracakkārānaṃ hananappakārañca dassetvā idāni sabbehipi dvādasahi paṭiccasamuppādaṅgehi rathavirahitameva kevalaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ, tassa araghātanappakārabhedañca dassetuṃ athavātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha anamatagganti anu anu amataggaṃ, sabbathā anugacchantehipi aviññātakoṭikanti attho. Avijjāmūlakattā jarāmaraṇapariyosānattāti idaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ dasannaṃ arabhāvena ekattaṃ samāropetvāti vuttaṃ. Na hi tesaṃ paccekaṃ avijjāmūlakatā jarāmaraṇapariyosānatā ca atthi tathā paṭiccasamuppādapāḷiyaṃ avuttattā. Atha vā tesampi yathārahaṃ atthato avijjāmūlakattaṃ, attano attano lakkhaṇabhūtakhaṇikajarāmaraṇavasena tappariyosānatañca sandhāyetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Evañca tesaṃ paccekaṃ arabhāvo siddho hoti.
这样,先用一切方式显示了轮回之轮本身,现在为了说明世尊是靠哪种智慧才得以斩断这轮回之轮的辐条,由于论母中说过“在把握缘的时候,慧就是法住智”,所以先以把握的方式,显示了在有的轮的各支分——无明等当中,缘以及缘所生法的运作方式。接着,又以归纳其含义的方式,依据《无碍解道》中“像这样,这个无明是因”等经文,如实显示了法住智本身;并且显示了这种智在无明等当中,按四种略说等方式展开的分别。此后,又用“像这样,世尊……”等经文,显示世尊以这种法住智,从一切方面通达了缘起;然后,为了用“又以这种法住智……”等经文显示世尊以这种智摧毁了轮回之轮的辐条,就在那里说了“在苦等当中无知,就是无明”等。其中,“三处”是指眼、耳、意三处。在“三触”等当中,也是同样的道理。应当知道,由色爱等而分为六种爱身。巴利
Evaṃ sabbākāraṃ saṃsāracakkameva dassetvā idāni yena ñāṇena imassa saṃsāracakkassa arānaṃ chedo bhagavato siddho, tassa dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇassa ‘‘paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. 4; 1.45) mātikā vuttattā bhavacakkāvayavesu avijjādīsu paccayapaccayuppannattā pariggahavasena pavattiākāraṃ dassetvā parato tassa atthassa nigamanavasena vuttena evamayaṃ avijjāhetūtiādikena paṭisambhidāpāḷisahitena (paṭi. ma. 1.45) pāṭhena sarūpato dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ, tassa ca tesuyeva avijjādīsu catusaṅkhepādivasena pavattivibhāgañca dassetvā tato paraṃ iti bhagavātiādipāṭhena bhagavato tena dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇena paṭiccasamuppādassa sabbākārato paṭividdhabhāvaṃ dassetvā puna iminā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇenātiādinā bhagavato tena ñāṇena saṃsāracakkārānaṃ viddhaṃsitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ tattha dukkhādīsu aññāṇaṃ avijjātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tiṇṇaṃ āyatanānanti cakkhusotamanāyatanānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ. Esa nayo tiṇṇaṃ phassānantiādīsupi. Rūpataṇhādivasena cha taṇhākāyā eva veditabbā.
“天界成就”是指欲界善趣中的成就。“就在那里”是指正是以欲取为缘。“梵界成就”是指色界梵天的成就。因为三地诸法所缘的一切贪都属于烦恼欲,所以有爱也就是欲取,因此说“正是以欲取为缘而修习慈心”。在其余以取为根本的解说中,也就是以见取、戒禁取、我语取为根本的解说中。这里解说的方式是这样的:在此,有人执取“没有他世,自我断灭”的见解,他以见取为缘,以身行恶行等;另一个人执取“在某个存在中自我断灭”的见解,为了投生到欲有、色有、无色有而造作种种善法等,这就是以见取为根本的解说;依照同样的方式,应当知道以我语取为根本的解说。又有人把“依戒清净、依仪轨清净”这种不清净的道执取为“清净道”,以戒禁取为缘,以身行恶行等,在一切存在中,应当知道这就是以戒禁取为根本的解说。巴利
Saggasampattinti kāmasugatīsu sampattiṃ. Tathevāti kāmupādānapaccayā eva. Brahmalokasampattinti rūpībrahmalokasampattiṃ. Tebhūmakadhammavisayassa sabbassāpi rāgassa kilesakāmabhāvato bhavarāgopi kāmupādānamevāti āha ‘‘kāmupādānapaccayāyeva mettaṃ bhāvetī’’ti. Sesupādānamūlikāsupīti diṭṭhupādānasīlabbatupādānaattavādupādānamūlikāsupi yojanāsu. Tatrāyaṃ yojanānayo – idhekacco ‘‘natthi paraloko ucchijjati attā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.85-86 atthato samānaṃ) diṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, so diṭṭhupādānapaccayā kāyena duccaritaṃ caratītiādinā, aparo ‘‘asukasmiṃ bhave attā ucchijjatī’’ti diṭṭhiṃ gahetvā kāmarūpārūpabhavūpapattiyā taṃ taṃ kusalaṃ karotītiādinā ca diṭṭhupādānamūlikā yojanā, imināva nayena attavādupādānamūlikā yojanā veditabbā. Aparo ‘‘sīlena suddhi vatena suddhī’’ti asuddhimaggaṃ ‘‘suddhimaggo’’ti parāmasanto sīlabbatupādānapaccayā kāyena duccaritaṃ caratītiādinā sabbabhavesu sīlabbatupādānamūlikā yojanā veditabbā.
现在,为了说明能摧毁轮回之轮的法住智是如何把握无明等缘的,通过“在欲有中,无明是欲有中诸行的缘”等说法,已经显示了无明等的缘的状态和缘所生法的状态。为了以归结的方式显示这个智在无明等中的运作方式,就引用《无碍解道》的经文,以归结的方式显示,而说了“如是此”等话。不过在《清净道论注》中说:“现在,那位展示轮回之轮的人,通过‘在欲有中,无明是欲有中诸行的缘’等说法,显示了无明等的缘的状态和诸行等的缘所生状态;为了以归结的方式显示这个,引用了《无碍解道》的经文,以归结的方式显示而说‘如是此’等。”《萨罗他迪波尼》律藏复注中也写了同样的文句。但在这里,通过“在欲有中,无明”等说法,展示轮回之轮的人所说的无明等的缘与缘所生状态,并不是那样,因为无明作为轮毂、作为根本等已经在前面显示过了,而且后面也没有以轮相的作用来做归结。又说“而且,为了以归结的方式显示那缘与缘所生状态”,但在这里,并不是把缘与缘所生状态作为重点以归结的方式来显示,而是把依缘把握方式而起的法住智本身,以归结的方式显示了如前所说的缘把握的方式。正如这样说:“如是,此无明是因,诸行是因所生,这两者都是因所生——在缘的把握中的慧就是法住智。过去时也是如此。未来时也是如此:无明是因……法住智。”这里是以法住智本身作为重点来显示的。而“无明是因,诸行是因所生”等话,因为被称为“在缘的把握中的慧就是法住智”,所以是为了说明那个缘把握的方式而作为对象来说的,不是作为重点来说的。巴利
Idāni yassa saṃsāracakkārānaṃ ghātanasamatthassa dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇassa avijjādipaccayapaaggahākāraṃ dassetuṃ kāmabhave ca avijjā kāmabhave saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo hotītiādinā avijjādīnaṃ paccayapaccayuppannabhāvo dassito, tameva ñāṇaṃ avijjādīsu pavattiākārena saddhiṃ paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷiṃ ānetvā nigamanavasena dassento evamayantiādimāha. Visuddhimaggaṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘idāni yvāyaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ dassentena kāmabhave avijjā kāmabhave saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo hotītiādinā avijjādīnaṃ paccayabhāvo saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayuppannabhāvo dassito, tameva paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷiṃ ānetvā nigamanavasena dassento evamayantiādimāhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sāratthadīpaniyā vinayaṭīkāyapi ayameva pāṭho likhito. Tattha ca kāmabhave ca avijjātiādinā avijjādīnaṃ paccayapaccayuppannabhāvo saṃsāracakkaṃ dassentena vutto na hoti tassa ca avijjā nābhi, mūlattātiādinā pubbeva dassitattā upari cakkarūpato payogattena upasaṃhārābhāvā ca. ‘‘Api ca tameva paccayapaccayuppannabhāvaṃ nigamanavasena dassento’’ti ca vuttaṃ, na cettha paccayapaccayuppannabhāvo nigamanavasena padhānattena dassito, atha kho paccayapariggahavasappavattaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇameva yathāvuttapaccayapariggahākārassa nigamanavasena dassitaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘evamayaṃ avijjā hetu, saṅkhārā hetusamuppannā, ubhopete dhammā hetusamuppannāti paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ. Atītampi addhānaṃ. Anāgatampi addhānaṃ avijjā hetu…pe… dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.46) dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇameva padhānattena dassitaṃ. ‘‘Avijjā hetu, saṅkhārā hetusamuppannā’’tiādi pana paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti (paṭi. ma. mātikā 4; 1.45) vuccamānattā tassa paccayapariggahākāraparidīpanatthaṃ visayattena vuttaṃ, na padhānattena.
这里的意思是:“如是”——按照刚才所说的方式,这无明是诸行的因,诸行则是由这个因而生起的。“此二者”——因为无明并不像外道所设想的神我、自在天等那样是无因的、恒常的、不变的,而是依据“由漏集起故无明集起”这一说法,它本身就是有因的、有为的、无常的,所以无明和诸行这两者都是因所生起的。“如是”——按照上面所说的方式,在把握诸缘时生起的那种慧,因为它如实运行于诸法的安住,也就是因之中,所以称为法住智。巴利
Ayañhettha attho – evanti anantare vuttanayena ayaṃ avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ hetu, saṅkhārā ca tena hetunā samuppannā. Ubhopeteti yasmā ayaṃ avijjā paraparikappitapakatiissarādi viya ahetukā niccā dhuvā na hoti, atha kho ‘‘āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.103) vacanato sayampi sahetukā saṅkhatā aniccāyeva hoti, tasmā ubhopete avijjāsaṅkhārā hetusamuppannāyeva. Itīti evaṃ yathāvuttanayena paccayapariggaṇhane yā paññā, taṃ dhammānaṃ ṭhitisaṅkhāte kāraṇe yāthāvato pavattattā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ nāmāti.
在这里,确实只是从阐明智的所缘这一角度,才说无明等是缘等状态,并不是把它们当作重点来说;这里真正作为重点来说的,就是智本身。因此,正是为了显示这个智把握缘的方式,前面才通过“在欲有中,无明……”等说法,讲述了无明等的缘等状态;在这里,也是以总结的方式把它收摄起来,并不是为了显示有轮。这是我自己的一点看法。巴利
Ettha hi ñāṇassa visayavibhāvanavaseneva avijjādīnaṃ paccayādibhāvo vutto, na padhānattena, ñāṇameva panettha padhānato vuttaṃ, tasmā etassa ñāṇassa paccayapariggahākāradassanatthameva heṭṭhāpi kāmabhave ca avijjātiādinā avijjādīnaṃ paccayādibhāvo vutto, idhāpi nigamanavasena upasaṃhaṭo, na bhavacakkadassanatthanti ayamettha attano mati.
在这里,如果还没有见到缘所生的诸法,就不可能见到诸因作为缘的状态。所以在《无碍解道》解说“缘把握智”时,说到“诸行是因所生的”,应当知道这也是在摄取缘所生的诸法。依照这个道理,也就是按照讲无明时所说的方式,应当以“诸行是因,识是因所生”等说法,把一直到生为止的所有句节都详细展开。巴利
Tattha ca paccayuppannadhammesu adiṭṭhesu hetūnaṃ paccayabhāvopi na sakkā daṭṭhunti ‘‘saṅkhārā hetusamuppannā’’ti paccayapariggahañāṇaniddese (paṭi. ma. 1.45) paccayuppannadhammānampi gahaṇaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Etena nayenāti avijjāyaṃ vuttanayena saṅkhārā hetu, viññāṇaṃ hetusamuppannantiādinā sabbāni jātipariyosānāni padāni vitthāretabbāni.
像这样,在《无碍解道》的巴利文中,先说明了法住智在无明等(缘起支)上生起的行相,现在为了说明这个智在那些缘上也能以其他行相生起,所以说了“在那里”等话。其中,“在那里”就是指在那些缘起支当中。“略说”在这里是指:无明等按因的共性或果的共性来归纳,就是略说、统摄、分类、集合的意思。这种略说从种类上分有两种,再按时间差别分成四种。“现在世”这个说法是顺着接下去的。爱、取、有被收进来,是因为它们和烦恼、业的共性,以及它们与烦恼、业不可分离。又因为无明等烦恼轮和果报法的法性相似,所以这里只说是业轮,因此说了“这五法”等话。在“果报法”等当中,虽然只有业所生的非色蕴才可以称为果报,但在名色等地方,因为无色法占主导、数量也多的缘故,连带有色的五果法也被说为“果报轮”。意思是:以果报为主的轮,或者果报多的轮。或者,这里应该把“果报”这个词看作“业所生”的同义词。以生、老死为名目来说,意思是:离开胜义法根本就没有所谓的生、老死,所以用它们作名目,也就是通过它们、以它们为门来说。“行相”的意思是被呈现、被显示,也就是无明等的自性,从这些缘的行相来说就是这个意思。应当看到:第一种是不断生起的因果连接,第二种是果因连接,第三种是因(再)生果的连接。巴利
Evaṃ paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷiyā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇassa avijjādīsu pavattiākāraṃ dassetvā idāni tassa tesu paccayesu aññehipi ākārehi pavattiākāraṃ dassetuṃ tatthātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu paṭiccasamuppādaṅgesu. Saṅkhippanti ettha avijjādayo hetusāmaññena phalasāmaññena vāti saṅkhepo, saṅgaho, koṭṭhāso rāsīti attho. So pana jātito duvidhopi kālabhedavasena catubbidho jāto. Paccuppanno addhāti anuvattati. Taṇhupādānabhavā gahitā kilesakammasāmaññato tadavinābhāvato ca. Avijjādikilesavaṭṭampi vipākadhammadhammatāsarikkhatāya idha kammavaṭṭamevāti āha ime pañca dhammātiādi. Vipākā dhammātiādīsu kammajaarūpakkhandhānameva vipākasaddavacanīyattepi nāmarūpādipadesu rūpamissampi phalapañcakaṃ arūpappadhānatāya ca tabbahulatāya ca ‘‘vipākavaṭṭa’’nti vuttaṃ. Vipākappadhānaṃ vaṭṭaṃ, vipākabahulaṃ vā vaṭṭanti attho. Kammajapariyāyo vā ettha vipāka-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Jātijarāmaraṇāpadesenāti paramatthadhammavinimuttajātijarāmaraṇaṃ nāma natthīti tadapadesena tesaṃ kathanena taṃmukhenāti attho. Ākirīyanti pakāsīyantīti ākārā, avijjādisarūpā, tato paccayākāratoti attho. Eko sandhīti avicchedappavattihetubhūto hetuphalasandhi, dutiyo phalahetusandhi, tatiyo hetuphalasandhīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
已经用种种方式说明了法住智在无明等法上生起的情形,现在,为了依照《无碍解道》的体系,说明世尊以这些方式以及一切未说到的方式通达了缘起,并且说明那个智就是“法住智”这个说法生起的根据,所以以总结的方式说了“iti bhagavā”等话。其中,“iti”是指向前面所说的那种情形,因此说了“四种略说”等。“以一切方式”是说:在这里,以“欲有中的无明是欲有中诸行的缘”等说法,通过这里已说的和未说的,以及《缘起分别》等(Vibh. 225 等)中出现的所有方式而通达。“taṃ”是指:世尊以那个智如此了知,那个智就是“taṃ”。“以已知之义”就是“以了知之义”。“以遍知之义”就是“以通达之义”。巴利
Evaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇassa avijjādīsu anekehi pakārehi pavattiākāraṃ dassetvā idāni tehi, avuttehi ca sabbehi ākārehi bhagavato paṭiccasamuppādassa paṭividdhabhāvaṃ, tassa ca ñāṇassa dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇasaddappavattinimittataṃ paṭisambhidāpāḷinayena dassetuṃ upasaṃhāravasena iti bhagavātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha itīti vuttappakāraparāmasanaṃ, tenāha catusaṅkhepantiādi. Sabbākāratoti idha kāmabhave ca avijjā kāmabhave saṅkhārānaṃ paccayotiādinā idha vuttehi ca avuttehi ca paṭiccasamuppādavibhaṅgādīsu (vibha. 225 ādayo) āgatehi sabbehi pakārehi paṭivijjhati. Tanti yena ñāṇena bhagavā evaṃ jānāti, taṃ ñāṇaṃ. Ñātaṭṭhenāti jānanaṭṭhena. Pajānanaṭṭhenāti paṭivijjhanaṭṭhena.
现在,这个法住智已经连同把握缘的行相差别被详细开示出来了。为了说明它在杀敌(断除烦恼)上的作用,所以说了“以此法住智”等话。其中,“以法住智杀敌”是前后关联。怎么杀呢?说了“那些法”等。意思是:用那个法住智如实了知无明等那些法,把它当作大金刚智的武器;然后以那强力观智为武器而生起厌离,再以圣道为武器离染、解脱,从而杀敌。因为圣道智从作用上说,从通达集谛等来说,也被称为“法住智”。巴利
Idāni yamidaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ paccayapariggahākārabhedehi saddhiṃ papañcato dassitaṃ, tasmiṃ araghāte etassa upayogitaṃ dassetuṃ iminā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇenātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇena are hanīti sambandho. Kathanti? Āha ‘‘te dhamme’’tiādi. Te avijjādike dhamme mahāvajirañāṇāvudhena tena dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇena yathābhūtaṃ ñatvā tena balavavipassanāvudhena nibbindanto ariyamaggāvudhena virajjanto vimuccanto are hanīti yojanā. Ariyamaggañāṇampi hi kiccato samudayasaccādibodhato ‘‘dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti vuccati.
“我以每一个住处,逐一供养每一个法蕴。”这种供养虽然是依着法蕴而进行的,但因为它是出于对世尊的敬爱而生起,又因为世尊以舍利塔等纪念物为庄严,所以它本身就是对世尊的供养。因此经文说“以世尊为对象”等等。“那位牟尼是烦恼的敌人”这一句里,有随韵音省略的现象,意思是:因为已经断除了烦恼之敌。“是缘等的应供者”这一句里,也应当看到有随韵音省略的现象。巴利
Ekekaṃ dhammakkhandhaṃ ekekavihārena pūjemīti dhammakkhandhaṃ ārabbha pavattāpi vihārakaraṇapūjā bhagavati pemeneva pavattattā sadhātukādicetiyapaṭimaṇḍitattā ca bhagavatova pūjāti āha bhagavantaṃ uddissātiādi. Kilesārīna so munīti ettha niggahītalopo, kilesārīnaṃ hatattāti attho. Paccayādīna cārahoti etthāpi niggahītalopo daṭṭhabbo.
“正自觉者”这个词里,“saṃ”这个音有“自己”的意思,所以经文说“亲自”,意思是没有人能引导他。“一切法”这个词,因为并没有限定在某个特定范围内,所以能够成立。如果没有限定范围,那么所认知的对象就被理解为没有范围限制,就像“受戒者不布施”这个例子一样。这样一来,因为不依赖特殊含义,就应该知道“佛陀”这个词本身只成立在作者自己身上,不需要用动作语来表达。在这里,从字面上只能得到“因为正确、亲自觉悟,所以是正自觉者”这一点;而“一切法”则是按意义所能得到的来理解,因为觉悟的作用不能没有对象。“应证知”是指应当以无常等特相、用世间和出世间的殊胜智慧去了知的四谛法。“应遍知”是指以无常等去限定、了知的苦圣谛。“应断”是指集谛。“应作证”是指灭谛。这里用复数来说,是考虑到“有余依”等依同义词所安立的不同类别。巴利
Sammāsambuddhoti ettha saṃ-saddo sayanti atthe pavattatīti āha ‘‘sāma’’nti, aparaneyyo hutvāti attho. Sabbadhammānanti idaṃ kassaci visayavisesassa aggahitattā siddhaṃ. Padesaggahaṇe hi asati gahetabbassa nippadesatāva viññāyati, yathā dikkhito na dadātīti. Evañca katvā atthavisesānapekkhā kattariyeva buddha-saddasiddhi veditabbā kammavacanicchāya abhāvato. ‘‘Sammā sāmaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho’’ti ettakameva hi idha saddato labbhati. Sabbadhammānanti idaṃ pana atthato labbhamānaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ, na hi bujjhanakiriyā avisayā yujjati. Abhiññeyyeti lakkhaṇādito aniccādito ca abhivisiṭṭhena lokiyalokuttarañāṇena jānitabbe catusaccadhamme. Pariññeyyeti aniccādivasena paricchinditvā jānitabbaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccamāha. Pahātabbeti samudayasaccaṃ. Sacchikātabbeti nirodhasaccaṃ. Bahuvacananiddeso panettha sopādisesādikaṃ pariyāyasiddhaṃ bhedaṃ apekkhitvā kato.
在“应证知”这句偈颂里,只要把应断的集谛和应修的道谛这些因法包含进来,它们果上的苦谛和灭谛也就随之成立了。所以应当知道,“应遍知”和“已遍知”、“应作证”和“已作证”在这里也都被含摄在内。因此说“所以我是觉者”。意思是:因为四谛都已为我所觉悟,所以一切应知之法我都已觉知、都已证知。巴利
Abhiññeyyanti gāthāya pahātabbabhāvetabbānaṃ samudayamaggasaccānaṃ hetudhammānaṃ gahaṇeneva tapphalānaṃ dukkhasaccanirodhasaccānampi siddhito pariññātabbañca pariññātaṃ sacchikātabbañca sacchikatanti idampettha saṅgahitamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ, tenāha ‘‘tasmā buddhosmī’’ti. Yasmā cattāripi saccāni mayā buddhāni, tasmā sabbampi ñeyyaṃ buddhosmi, abbhaññāsinti attho.
渴爱以种种不同的对象和种种追求的方式生起,所以它是苦之所以千差万别的根本原因,因此说“以根本因的方式”。两者,是指眼和眼的集起。“不转起”是指不转起的因相,并不是仅仅什么都不存在的虚无状态。由于它本身包含状态、有缘等种种差别,所以一切都已总摄在内。“了知灭”是指通过亲证现观而通达灭。逐句择取,就是依照“眼、眼的集起”等一项一项分别择取,并不只是从苦谛等共相来说,这是这里的意旨。为了显示渴爱也因摄在行苦之中而应当被遍知,所以说了“六渴爱身”,以表明它属于苦谛。然而,在某个生命体当中生起、能令该生命体生起的前世所成的渴爱,作为它的根本因,应当执取为集谛。遍处,是指以遍为所缘的禅那。三十二行相,是指头发等以及以它们为所缘的禅那。九有,就是欲有等三种、有想有等三种、一蕴有等三种,合起来共九有。四禅,是指不分别所缘的差异、仅从一般意义上说的四禅。异熟和唯作也应当随各处情况适宜地视为已总摄在内。在这里应当知道,善法是以渴爱为亲依止而令其生起的;而唯作法,则是以渴爱作为该生命体的因。顺应的,这里无明是苦谛,令它生起的前世渴爱与诸漏是集谛,应当这样配合理解。而在行等当中,则只应以无明等作为集谛来配合。因此。巴利
Vicittavisayapatthanākārappavattiyā taṇhā dukkhavicittatāya padhānakāraṇanti āha ‘‘mūlakāraṇabhāvenā’’ti. Ubhinnanti cakkhussa taṃsamudayassa ca. Appavattīti appavattinimittaṃ, na abhāvamattaṃ. Tassa avatthuttā sappaccayattādianekabhedā sabbasaṅgahitā. Nirodhappajānanāti sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena nirodhassa paṭivijjhanā. Ekekapaduddhārenāpīti cakkhu cakkhusamudayotiādinā ekekakoṭṭhāsaniddhāraṇenāpi, na dukkhasaccādisāmaññato evāti adhippāyo. Taṇhāyapi saṅkhāradukkhapariyāpannatāya pariññeyyattā dukkhasaccabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cha taṇhākāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmiṃ pana attabhāve sā uppajjati, tassa mūlakāraṇabhāvena samuṭṭhāpikā purimabhavasiddhā taṇhā samudayasaccanti gahetabbā. Kasiṇānīti kasiṇārammaṇāni jhānāni. Dvattiṃsākārāti kesādayo tadārammaṇajjhānāni ca. Nava bhavāti kāmabhavādayo tayo saññībhavādayo tayo ekavokārabhavādayo tayo cāti nava bhavā. Cattāri jhānānīti ārammaṇavisesaṃ anapekkhitvā sāmaññato cattāri jhānāni vuttāni. Vipākakiriyānampi yathārahaṃ sabbattha saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Ettha ca kusaladhammānaṃ upanissayabhūtā taṇhāsamuṭṭhāpikāti veditabbā, kiriyadhammānaṃ pana tassa attabhāvassa kāraṇabhūtā taṇhā. Anulomatoti ettha avijjā dukkhasaccaṃ, taṃsamuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā āsavā samudayasaccanti yojetabbaṃ. Saṅkhārādīsu pana avijjādayova samudayasaccabhāvena yojetabbā. Tenāti tasmā.
“明”是指让自己的领域被清楚知道,所以叫明。“具足故”是指具备、拥有,或者圆满的意思。“此处”是指在《庵婆咤经》里。“意所成神通”在这里,因为经中说“比丘从这个身体变化出另一个身体”,所以是依身内禅那之意,让另一个身体生起的方式而运作的,这叫作意所成神通;从实质上说,它就是与禅那相应的慧。“七正法”是指信、惭、愧、多闻、精进、念、慧。“走向不死之方”是指想要超越苦的人应当见到它,所以走向不死,也就是走向涅槃这个方向;这里也显示出,诸行因为具备三学所摄的圣道性,所以是求解脱涅槃的人必定希求的。现在为了显示他的明行具足是声闻等所不共的,所以说“其中,明具足”等等。其中,依漏尽明而成就一切知性,依包含在作为行法的诸禅中的大悲定而成就大悲性,所以说“明……大悲性”。“如同彼”这里的“如”只是虚词,意思是:就像其他明行具足的佛陀也这样教导,这位也是如此。因此,就是以此远离恶、导向善。“自苦等”中的“等”字,包含了苦他、苦自他两者。“不染着于诸有、不再来”是指:因为已断除的不会再产生,所以不再回来。巴利
Vijjāti attano visayaṃ viditaṃ karotīti vijjā. Sampannattāti samannāgatattā, sampuṇṇattā vā. Tatrāti ambaṭṭhasutte. Manomayiddhiyāti ettha ‘‘idha bhikkhu imamhā kāyā aññaṃ kāyaṃ abhinimminātī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.236) vuttattā sarīrabbhantarajhānamanena aññassa sarīrassa nibbattivasena pavattā manomayiddhi nāma, sā atthato jhānasampayuttā paññāyeva. Satta saddhammā nāma saddhā hirī ottappaṃ bāhusaccaṃ vīriyaṃ sati paññā ca. Gacchati amataṃ disanti dukkhanittharaṇatthikehi daṭṭhabbato amataṃ nibbānameva disaṃ gacchati, iminā ca caraṇānaṃ sikkhattayasaṅgahitaariyamaggabhāvato nibbānatthikehi ekaṃsena icchitabbataṃ dasseti. Idānissā vijjācaraṇasampadāya sāvakādiasādhāraṇataṃ dassetuṃ tattha vijjāsampadātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha āsavakkhayavijjāvasena sabbaññutā sijjhati, caraṇadhammabhūtesu jhānesu antogadhāya mahākaruṇāsamāpattiyā vasena mahākāruṇikatā sijjhatīti āha ‘‘vijjā…pe… mahākāruṇikata’’nti. Yathā tanti ettha tanti nipātamattaṃ, yathā aññopi vijjācaraṇasampanno buddho niyojeti, tathā ayampīti attho. Tenāti anatthaparivajjanaatthaniyojanena. Attantapādayoti ādi-saddena parantapaubhayantapā gahitā. Asajjamāno bhavesu apaccāgacchantoti pahīnānaṃ punānuppattito na puna upagacchanto.
这里说的“其中”,是指在与应成就的适当言语说示相关的语境中,这是一个依处格用法。“非实”,就是非真实之事。“不真”,是它的另一种说法。“伴随不利”,就是带有离间等过失。“善说故”,是因为言辞美妙;“说”就是言说,也就是讲话,这是它的意思。有美妙言辞之语,本来应该说成“善说”,但按照语法规则,把 da 变成 ta,所以说成“善逝”。巴利
Tatrāti yuttavācābhāsane sādhetabbe cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Abhūtanti abhūtatthaṃ. Atacchanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Anatthasaṃhitanti pisuṇādidosayuttaṃ. Sammāgadattāti sundaravacanattā, gadanaṃ gado, kathananti attho. Sundaro gado vacanamassāti ‘‘sugado’’ti vattabbe niruttinayena da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘sugato’’ti vuttaṃ.
“自性”是指苦的自性。“世间”是指蕴等世间。为了说明前面所说的义理,世尊依经说“其中”等语。这里的“其中”,是指在被称为世间边的涅槃之中。“彼”就是世间的尽头——我不是说,可以靠身体在器世间行走而了知、而证得,应当这样理解上下文。这段话也是因为罗希陀天子问的是:能否靠身体行走而到达世间边,所以才这样说。所谓“没有到达世间边”,是就蕴等世间而说的。巴利
Sabhāvatoti dukkhasabhāvato. Lokanti khandhādilokaṃ. Yathāvuttamatthaṃ suttato āha yatthātiādi. Tattha yatthāti yasmiṃ lokantasaṅkhāte nibbāne. Tanti lokassantaṃ, okāsaloke kāyagamanena ñātabbaṃ pattabbanti nāhaṃ vadāmīti yojanā. Idañca rohitadevaputtena lokassa kāyagativasena antagamanassa pucchitattā vuttaṃ. Appatvā lokassantanti khandhādilokaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
难道我要用脚步走遍整个空间世界来给你看吗?我是说,对于那些以智慧前往有限之处的人,我才能指示。为了说明这一点,世尊说了“复次”等话。其中,“在仅一寻的躯体中”指的是身体,以此显示色蕴。“有想”是以想为代表,指受、想、行这三蕴。“有识”指识蕴。“世间”指蕴等世间,意思是苦。“世间灭”指通过涅槃使世间灭尽,或者就是指涅槃本身。涅槃虽然对某些人来说并非他们的境界,但因为是灭尽的原因,从近似的角度说,似乎依赖于他们而存在,所以说“在仅一寻的躯体中,我也施设世间灭”,就像“眼在世间是可爱、可意之色,那里这渴爱若灭则灭”等经文中那样。“何时”指某个时候。“未达”指未以最上道证得。因此,因为以行走无法到达它,所以。“确实”只是语气词,或者表示决定之义。“世间解”指从自性等方面了知蕴等。“四谛法”因现观故为“已证”,或者意思是“已灭尽烦恼”。“不希望”指不希求,因为不再受生的缘故。巴利
Kinte padasā okāsalokaparibbhamanena, parimitaṭṭhāne eva taṃ ñāṇagamanena gacchantānaṃ dassemīti dassento api cātiādimāha. Tattha byāmamatte kaḷevareti sarīre. Tena rūpakkhandhaṃ dasseti. Sasaññimhīti saññāsīsena vedanādayo tayo khandhe. Samanaketi viññāṇakkhandhaṃ. Lokanti khandhādilokaṃ, dukkhanti attho. Lokanirodhanti nibbānena lokassa nirujjhanaṃ, nibbānameva vā. Adesampi hi nibbānaṃ yesaṃ nirodhāya hoti, upacārato tannissitaṃ viya hotīti ‘‘byāmamatte kaḷevare lokanirodhampi paññapemī’’ti vuttaṃ, cakkhu loke piyarūpaṃ, sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā nirujjhamānā nirujjhatītiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.401; vibha. 204) viya. Kudācananti kadācipi. Appatvāti aggamaggena anadhigantvā. Tasmāti yasmā taṃ gamanena pattuṃ na sakkā, tasmā. Haveti nipātamattaṃ, ekaṃsatthe vā . Lokavidūti sabhāvādito khandhādijānanako. Catusaccadhammānaṃ abhisamitattā samitāvī, samitakilesoti vā attho. Nāsīsati na pattheti appaṭisandhikattā.
像这样从简略的角度显示了世间之后,现在为了从详细的角度显示它,又说了“还有,三种世间”等话。其中,有情世间就是与根相连的诸蕴的聚集和相续。它因为对色等事物执著为有情,所以叫“有情”;又因为业、烦恼以及它们的果报在这里面,所以叫“世间”。器世间就是与根不相连的时节所生色的聚集和相续。它因为是有情诸行的依托处,所以叫“处所”;又因为它的依托处和所依托的东西在这里面,所以叫“世间”。而与根相连和与根不相连的一切取蕴,因为依缘而造作、因为会坏灭,所以叫“行世间”。能带来自己的果,所以叫食,也就是缘。依它而住立是它的本性,生起之后直到坏灭都在运转是它的本性,所以叫食住立者,也就是一切有为法。说到“一切有情”,也是因为随顺所化众生的根机、以人为施设的立足点来教导,所以实际上取的是诸行。巴利
Evaṃ saṅkhepato lokaṃ dassetvā idāni vitthārato taṃ dassetuṃ api ca tayo lokātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha indriyabaddhānaṃ khandhānaṃ samūhasantānabhūto sattaloko. So hi rūpādīsu sattavisattatāya ‘‘satto’’ti ca, lokiyanti ettha kammakilesā tabbipākā cāti ‘‘loko’’ti ca vuccati. Anindriyabaddhānaṃ utujarūpānaṃ samūhasantānabhūto okāsaloko. So hi sattasaṅkhārānaṃ ādhārato ‘‘okāso’’ti ca, lokiyanti ettha tassādhārā ca ādheyyabhūtāti ‘‘loko’’ti ca pavuccati. Indriyānindriyabaddhā pana sabbeva upādānakkhandhā paccayehi saṅkhataṭṭhena lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena ca ‘‘saṅkhāraloko’’ti ca vuccati. Āharati attano phalanti āhāro, paccayo. Tena tiṭṭhanasīlā uppajjitvā yāva bhaṅgā pavattanasīlāti āhāraṭṭhitikā, sabbe saṅkhatadhammā. Sabbe sattāti ca imināpi veneyyānurūpato puggalādhiṭṭhānattā desanāya saṅkhārāva gahitā.
日月运行到哪里,就表示日月转动、运行在多大的范围内。照耀,是指它们照耀的原因、发光的原因,这里用的是表示原因的从格。照亮诸方,是说黑暗消失后,一切方向都显现出来。或者,诸方是受格复数。因此,意思是:正在照耀的日月,照亮多少方向。千重世界,就是以那么大的范围,有千种形态的器世间,意思是千个轮围世界。此处,就是在千个轮围世界中。自在,是说被称为神通的自在力在运作。巴利
Yāvatā candimasūriyā pariharantīti yattake ṭhāne candimasūriyā parivattanti pavattanti. Virocanāti tesaṃ virocanahetu obhāsanahetūti hetumhi nissakkavacanaṃ. Disā bhantīti sabbā disā yāvatā vigatandhakārā paññāyanti. Atha vā disāti upayogabahuvacanaṃ. Tasmā virocamānā candimasūriyā yattakā disā bhanti obhāsentīti attho. Tāva sahassadhā lokoti tattakena pamāṇena sahassappakāro okāsaloko, sahassacakkavāḷānīti attho. Etthāti sahassacakkavāḷe. Vasoti iddhisaṅkhāto vaso vattatīti attho.
“那也是”,指的是三种世间。“对此”,是说世尊以这种方式完全了知了行世间,这样连接起来。“一种世间”:就像前面所说的那样,因为一切有为法都依缘而起、随缘而转,以这个共同性来说,行世间就是一种、一类;其余几种也照这样类推。无论在哪种情况下,只有世间法才被称为世间,因为出世间法并不是应当被遍知的。作为执取对象的诸蕴,就是取蕴。“七识住”,指的是以各种方式生起的众生类:身异想异、身异想一、身一想异、身一想一,再加上下面的三种无色处。这七类众生,识就安住在这里,所以叫识住。其中,身体各不相同的,叫身异;想各不相同的,叫想异。这里是以想为代表,实际指的是结生识,其余几种也照这样理解。巴利
Tampīti tividhampi lokaṃ. Assāti anena bhagavatā saṅkhāralokopi sabbathā viditoti sambandho. Eko lokoti yvāyaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayena sabbasaṅkhatānaṃ paccayāyattavuttito tena sāmaññena saṅkhāraloko eko ekavidho, esa nayo sesesupi. Sabbatthāpi lokiyadhammāva lokoti adhippetā lokuttarānaṃ pariññeyyattābhāvā. Upādānānaṃ ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā upādānakkhandhā. Satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti tathā tathā samuppannā pajāyeva vuccanti. Nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, nānattakāyā ekattasaññino, ekattakāyā nānattasaññino, ekattakāyā ekattasaññino, heṭṭhimā ca tayo āruppāti imā sattavidhā pajāyeva viññāṇaṃ tiṭṭhati etthāti viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo nāma. Tattha nānattaṃ kāyo etesamatthīti nānattakāyā. Nānattaṃ saññā etesanti nānattasaññino. Saññāsīsenettha paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ gahitaṃ, esa nayo sesesupi.
在这里,所有人类和六欲界天人都叫“身异想异”。因为他们的身体彼此不同,所以叫“身异”;结生识的想有九种不同,所以叫“想异”。初禅三地里的梵众天等梵类诸天,以及四恶趣里的众生,叫“身异想一”。其中,梵众天等三者的身体彼此不同,但结生识的想因为初禅果报的缘故,是同一个;恶趣众生也是这样,不过他们所有人的结生识的想都是不善果报的无因想。第二禅地的少光天、无量光天、光音天,叫“身一想异”。因为他们所有人的身体都是同一个量度,但结生识的想因为第二禅和第三禅果报的缘故而有不同。第三禅地里的少净天等三天,第四禅地里除去无想有情之外的广果天,以及五净居天,这九地里的众生,叫“身一想一”。不过,不能因为光明的差异就认为身体有差异,只有因为形态的差异才认为身体有差异。无想有情因为没有识,所以不算在识住之数里。非想非非想处则因为想极其微细,识也极其微细,既不能说有识也不能说无识,所以不算在具有明显识作用的识住里。因此,只取了其余的空无边处等三个无色界。应当知道,加上这三个,就构成了这七识住。巴利
Tattha sabbamanussā ca cha kāmāvacaradevā ca nānattakāyā nānattasaññino nāma. Tesañhi aññamaññaṃ visadisatāya nānā kāyo, paṭisandhisaññā ca navavidhatāya nānā. Tīsu paṭhamajjhānabhūmīsu brahmakāyikā ceva catūsu apāyesu sattā ca nānattakāyā ekattasaññino nāma. Tesu hi brahmapārisajjādīnaṃ tiṇṇampi sarīraṃ aññamaññaṃ visadisaṃ, paṭisandhisaññā pana paṭhamajjhānavipākavasena ekāva, tathā āpāyikānampi, tesaṃ pana sabbesaṃ akusalavipākāhetukāva paṭisandhisaññā. Dutiyajjhānabhūmikā ca parittābha appamāṇābha ābhassarā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino nāma. Tesañhi sabbesaṃ ekappamāṇova kāyo, paṭisandhisaññā pana dutiyatatiyajjhānavipākavasena nānā hoti. Tatiyajjhānabhūmiyaṃ parittasubhādayo tayo, catutthajjhānabhūmiyaṃ asaññasattavajjitā vehapphalā, pañca ca suddhāvāsāti navasu bhūmīsu sattā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino nāma. Ābhānānattena pana sabbattha kāyanānattaṃ na gayhati, saṇṭhānanānatteneva gayhatīti. Asaññasattā viññāṇābhāvena viññāṇaṭṭhitisaṅkhyaṃ na gacchanti. Nevasaññā nāsaññāyatanaṃ pana yathā saññāya, evaṃ viññāṇassāpi sukhumattā nevaviññāṇaṃ nāviññāṇaṃ, tasmā paribyattaviññāṇakiccavantesu viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu na gayhati. Tasmā sesāni ākāsānañcāyatanādīni tīṇiyeva gahitāni, tehi saddhiṃ imā satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti veditabbā.
八种世间法,就是得、失、誉、毁、讥、称、乐、苦。这八种因为是世间的本性,所以叫世间法。不过这里应当知道,由得、失等条件所生起的贪著和抗拒,也用“得”等词来表达。九有情居,就是前面说的七识住,再加上无想有情和第四无色界,合起来叫“九有情居”。有情居住在那里,所以叫有情居,也就是有情类;从义理上说,应当知道这里是以行于世间的方式,来统摄这样转起的众生类。十处,就是除去法处和意处的十处。巴利
Aṭṭha lokadhammāti lābho alābho yaso ayaso nindā pasaṃsā sukhaṃ dukkhanti ime aṭṭha lokassa sabhāvattā lokadhammā. Lābhālābhādipaccayā uppajjanakā panettha anurodhavirodhā vā lābhādisaddehi vuttāti veditabbā. Nava sattāvāsāti heṭṭhā vuttā satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo eva asaññasattacatutthāruppehi saddhiṃ ‘‘nava sattāvāsā’’ti vuccanti. Sattā āvasanti etthāti sattāvāsā, sattanikāyo, atthato tathā pavattā pajā eva idha saṅkhāralokabhāvena gayhantīti veditabbā. Dasāyatanānīti dhammāyatanamanāyatanavajjitāni dasa.
在这里,对于三有,是依观察其中的滋味,而只以“世间”这个说法来讲三种受;同样地,依观察缘,而只讲四种食;依观察执取我的相,而只讲六内处;依观察粗想的有,而只讲七识住;依观察随喜与违逆,或者说八世间法;依观察粗显的处,而只讲十处为世间。只要含摄了这些,那么,在义理上,依止于它们、与它们相系属、以它们为所缘的一切三界名色法,就已经被含摄了。而其余那些从“一种”等分类来说的,则应知道,是依它们各自的自性而被含摄的。巴利
Ettha ca tīsu bhavesu assādadassanavasena tisso vedanāva lokabhāvena vuttā, tathā paccayadassanavasena cattārova āhārā. Attaggāhanimittadassanavasena cha ajjhattikāneva āyatanāni. Thūlasaññībhavadassanavasena satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyova, anurodhavirodhadassanavasena aṭṭha lokadhammā vā, thūlāyatanadassanavasena dasāyatanāneva lokabhāvena vuttāni. Tesaṃ gahaṇeneva tannissayatappaṭibaddhā tadārammaṇā sabbe tebhūmakā nāmarūpadhammā atthato gahitā eva honti. Sesehi pana ekavidhādikoṭṭhāsehi sarūpeneva te gahitāti veditabbaṃ.
在“他了知心性向”等语句中,心一再地靠向并停留在那里,这就是心性向。即使心在其他所缘上生起活动,它也会以自身的本性进入并停留在那个地方,这就是心性向。它有两种:轮转的心性向和还灭的心性向。其中,轮转的心性向又因为常见和断见而分为两种。还灭的心性向则因为被称为观智的随顺忍,以及被称为道智的如实智,而分为两种。正如所说的:巴利
Āsayaṃ jānātītiādīsu āhacca cittaṃ ettha setīti āsayo, aññasmiṃ visaye pavattitvāpi cittaṃ yattha sarasena pavisitvā tiṭṭhati, so vaṭṭāsayo vivaṭṭāsayoti duvidho. Tattha vaṭṭāsayopi sassatucchedadiṭṭhivasena duvidho. Vivaṭṭāsayo pana vipassanāsaṅkhātā anulomikā khanti, maggasaṅkhātaṃ yathābhūtañāṇañcāti duvidho. Yathāha –
常见与断见,以及随顺忍;
如实了知的那个智,这就叫做意乐。巴利
‘‘Sassatucchedadiṭṭhi ca, khanti cevānulomikaṃ; Yathābhūtañca yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, etaṃ āsayasaddita’’nti. (sārattha. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā);
世尊对众生这两种意乐,在他们还没有生起的那个刹那就已经全部了知。随眠,就是欲贪随眠等七种随眠。行,在释义里说的是“善行、恶行”。或者也可以说,行就是行为,指贪等六种根本行为,由于交往和聚集而变成许多种。志趣,就是心的倾向,是心在各种地方随喜好而倾向,它有两种:低劣的志趣和殊胜的志趣。靠它去亲近破戒等低劣志趣的人,就是低劣的志趣;靠它去亲近殊胜志趣的人,就是殊胜的志趣。世尊对这两种志趣都以一切方式了知。贪等尘垢少,就是少尘垢者,他们没有随眠的贪等过失;贪等过失增盛,就是多尘垢者。具备作为亲依止的锐利信等根,或具备迟钝的信等根,就是利根和钝根。应当知道,具备前面所说的意乐等善或不善,就是善行相和恶行相。容易让人进入正性决定,就是容易教化的;与此相反,就是难以教化的。具备证悟道果的亲依止,就是堪能者;与此相反,就是不堪能者。应当知道,像这样通过了知众生相续中的种种法,也就了知了众生世间,因为离开法并没有独立的众生。巴利
Etaṃ duvidhampi āsayaṃ sattānaṃ appavattikkhaṇeyeva bhagavā sabbathā jānāti. Anusayanti kāmarāgānusayādivasena sattavidhaṃ anusayaṃ. Caritanti ‘‘sucaritaduccarita’’nti niddese vuttaṃ. Atha vā caritanti cariyā, te rāgādayo cha mūlacariyā, saṃsaggasannipātavasena anekavidhā honti. Adhimuttinti ajjhāsayadhātuṃ, tattha tattha cittassa abhirucivasena ninnatā, sā duvidhā hīnādhimutti paṇītādhimuttīti. Yāya dussīlādike hīnādhimuttike sevanti, sā hīnādhimutti. Yāya paṇītādhimuttike sevanti, sā paṇītādhimutti. Taṃ duvidhampi adhimuttiṃ bhagavā sabbākārato jānāti. Appaṃ rāgādirajaṃ etesanti apparajakkhā, anussadarāgādidosā. Ussadarāgādidosā mahārajakkhā. Upanissayabhūtehi tikkhehi saddhādiindriyehi mudukehi ca samannāgatā tikkhindriyā mudindriyā ca. Heṭṭhā vuttehi āsayādīhi sundarehi asundarehi ca samannāgatā svākārā dvākārā ca veditabbā. Sammattaniyāmaṃ viññāpetuṃ sukarā suviññāpayā, viparītā duviññāpayā. Maggaphalapaṭivedhāya upanissayasampannā bhabbā, viparītā abhabbā. Evaṃ sattasantānagatadhammavisesajānaneneva sattalokopi vidito dhammavinimuttassa sattassa abhāvāti veditabbaṃ.
一个轮围……中间省略……以及五十由旬,这里“有”是剩下的部分。就周长来说,所说的量度是剩下的部分。轮围的整个圆周是三十六万……中间省略……还有一百,应当这样连接起来。其中:在轮围里,有二十万又四那由他由旬,也就是所谓“这大地”有这么厚、这么大的量,应当这样连接。其中,“这么大”应当看作是对动作的修饰。承载的水以这么大、这么大的量而安住,应当这样连接。在这里:就是在轮围里。沉入和高出,就是既沉入又高出。大,就是巨大。由旬的百是高,雪山是五,也就是高五百由旬,这是它的高度。树干周围三乘五由旬,就是十五由旬大小的干围。名为树者:就是名为树的阎浮树,应当这样连接。从一切方面,就是从一切部分,长和宽各一百由旬,这是它的宽度,这就是意思。以它的威力:就是以它巨大、劫住等等这样的力量。围绕那一切,世界界安立:就是围绕前面所说的一切,轮围石环安立,这叫作一个世界界,这是意思,说ma音是为了连声。或者这样连接:围绕那一切世界界,这个轮围石环安立,应当这样理解。巴利
Ekaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ…pe… paññāsañca yojanānīti ettha hotīti seso. Parikkhepato pamāṇaṃ vuccatīti seso. Cakkavāḷassa sabbaṃ parimaṇḍalaṃ chattiṃsa satasahassāni…pe… satāni ca hontīti yojetabbaṃ. Tatthāti cakkavāḷe, dve satasahassāni cattāri nahutāni ca yojanāni yāni ettakaṃ ettakappamāṇaṃ bahalattena ayaṃ vasundharā saṅkhātāti yojanā. Tattha ettakanti kiriyāvisesanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sandhārakaṃ jalaṃ ettakaṃ ettakappamāṇaṃ hutvā patiṭṭhitanti yojanā. Etthāti cakkavāḷe. Ajjhogāḷhuggatāti ajjhogāḷhā ca uggatā ca. Brahāti mahantā. Yojanānaṃ satānucco, himavā pañcāti yojanānaṃ pañcasatāni ucco ubbedho. Tipañcayojanakkhandhaparikkhepāti pannarasayojanappamāṇakkhandhapariṇāhā. Nagavhayāti rukkhābhidhānā jambūti yojanā. Samantatoti sabbasobhāgena, āyāmato ca vitthārato ca satayojanavitthārāti attho. Yassānubhāvenāti yassā mahantatākappaṭṭhāyikādippakārena pabhāvena. Parikkhipitvā taṃ sabbaṃ, lokadhātumayaṃ ṭhitoti heṭṭhā vuttaṃ sabbampi taṃ parikkhipitvā cakkavāḷasiluccayo ṭhito, ayaṃ ekā lokadhātu nāmāti attho, ma-kāro padasandhivasena vutto. Atha vā taṃ sabbaṃ lokadhātuṃ parikkhipitvā ayaṃ cakkavāḷasiluccayo ṭhitoti yojetabbaṃ.
其中,即在那世界界中。三十三天宫,就是三十三天城。阿修罗宫,就是阿修罗城。阿鼻大地狱同样是一万由旬,不过它位于四道铁壁之间,长宽各一百由旬,四周连同十六个近边地狱合起来,说为一万由旬,应当这样理解。在其间,即那些轮围之间。因为存在于诸世界、诸轮围之间的空隙中,所以叫世界中间。就像三辆车的车轮或三片叶子靠近摆放时,中间出现的空隙那样,在每三个轮围之间,各有一个世界中间地狱,量八千由旬,是寒地狱,由众生的不善异熟所生。无边,即横向在八个方向上,轮围如同虚空一样无边无际。但上方和下方则是有边的。以无边的佛智,这里应当知道:因为具有通达无量所知的能力,所以智称为“无边”。巴利
Tatthāti tassaṃ lokadhātuyaṃ. Tāvatiṃsabhavananti tidasapuraṃ. Asurabhavananti asurapuraṃ. Avīcimahānirayo ca tathā dasasahassayojano, so pana catunnaṃ lohabhittīnamantarā yojanasatāyāmavitthāropi samantā soḷasahi ussadanirayehi saddhiṃ dasasahassayojano vuttoti veditabbo. Tadanantaresūti tesaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antaresu. Lokānaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antare vivare bhavattā lokantarikā. Tiṇṇañhi sakaṭacakkānaṃ pattānaṃ vā āsannaṭṭhapitānaṃ antarasadise tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antaresu ekeko lokantarikanirayo aṭṭhayojanasahassappamāṇo sītanarako sattānaṃ akusalavipākena nibbattati. Anantānīti tiriyaṃ aṭṭhasu disāsu cakkavāḷāni ākāso viya anantāni. Uddhaṃ pana adho ca antāneva. Anantena buddhañāṇenāti ettha anantañeyyapaṭivedhasāmatthiyayogatova ñāṇaṃ ‘‘ananta’’nti veditabbaṃ.
“自己”这个词,是属格用来表达主格的含义,意思就是“从自己”。整句的关联是“以功德比自己更殊胜”,这里用“更”字,是为了解释“无上”这个词的含义,并不是真的存在某个更殊胜的人。因为在这个连同天界在内的世间里,连跟如来相似的人都找不到,何况是跟他相等的人?所以经文说“以戒德等也无人能及”等等。其中,跟无与伦比的正自觉者相等,就叫“无等等”;没有任何人能跟他相比,就叫“无譬”。其余几个词也是同样的道理。这里“譬”只是比喻的意思,“似譬”就是相像、对应。应当理解为:以对立面而安立的“比拟之人”。“自己”,就是从自己来说。“人应调”等词中,应当被调伏的人就是“应调”,本来应该说“应调人”,但把修饰语放在后面,所以说成“人应调”。这里说“人”,是以最殊胜的情况来说的,因为女人也是应当被调伏的。通过去除嗔恚之毒,使他们成为无害的人。“义句”,就是能显示意义的句子,意思是语句。以一句话就显示出导师作为调御丈夫的功德不共于他人,所以说“世尊”等等。“八方”,指八种等至。“无著”,就是因为达到了自在,所以能无碍而行。巴利
Attanoti nissakke sāmivacanametaṃ, attatoti attho. Guṇehi attano visiṭṭhatarassāti sambandho, taraggahaṇañcettha anuttaroti padassa atthaniddesavasena kataṃ, na visiṭṭhassa kassaci atthitāya. Sadevake hi loke sadisakappopi nāma koci tathāgatassa natthi, kuto sadiso, tenāha sīlaguṇenāpi asamotiādi. Tattha asamehi sammāsambuddhehi samo asamasamo. Natthi paṭimā etassāti appaṭimo. Esa nayo sesesupi. Tattha upamāmattaṃ paṭimā, sadisūpamā paṭibhāgo. Yugaggāhavasena ṭhito paṭimo puggaloti veditabbo. Attanāti attato. Purisadammetiādīsu damitabbā dammā, ‘‘dammapurisā’’ti vattabbe visesanassa paranipātaṃ katvā ‘‘purisadammā’’ti vuttaṃ, purisaggahaṇañcettha ukkaṭṭhavasena itthīnampi dametabbato. Nibbisā katā dosavisassa vinodanena. Atthapadanti atthābhibyañjanakaṃ padaṃ, vākyanti attho. Ekapadabhāvena ca anaññasādhāraṇo satthu purisadammasārathibhāvo dassito hoti, tenāha bhagavā hītiādi. Aṭṭha disāti aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Asajjamānāti vasībhāvappattiyā nissaṅgacārā.
“现法”是指眼前可见的自身存在,致力于此的,就叫“现法者”,意思是此世的利益。因为业和烦恼而应当前往、应当去到的地方,就是“来世”,也就是他世;致力于那里的,就叫“来世者”,意思是他世的利益。最上、最殊胜的利益,就是“第一义”,也就是涅槃。与利益一起行进的,叫“商队”,就是带着货物本钱、为了经商而前往他国的一群人。拥有这个商队的,就是“商主”,也就是商队的首领。这是依照词源规则作出的解释。世尊就像(商主一样),所以说“商主,世尊是商队首领”。现在为了依照尼提沙经典的次第来说明这个义理,所以说“如商队首领”等。其中,“于商队”指在商队众人之中。他们在这里让人渡过什么水,因此叫“荒野”,即没有水的林野地方。被盗贼等占据的林野地方,也因难以行走之义,由于与那相似,而通称为“荒野”。所以通泛地说“让人渡过荒野”之后,为了详细解释它,就说“盗贼荒野”等。巴利
Diṭṭhadhammo vuccati paccakkho attabhāvo, tattha niyuttoti diṭṭhadhammiko, idhalokattho. Kammakilesavasena samparetabbato samāgantabbato samparāyo , paraloko, tattha niyuttoti samparāyiko, paralokattho. Paramo uttamo attho paramattho, nibbānaṃ. Saha atthena vattatīti sattho, bhaṇḍamūlena vāṇijjāya desantaraṃ gacchanto janasamūho. So assa atthīti satthā, satthavāhoti niruttinayena. So viya bhagavāti āha ‘‘satthā, bhagavā satthavāho’’ti. Idāni tamatthaṃ niddesapāḷinayena dassetuṃ yathā satthavāhotiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sattheti satthike jane. Kaṃ udakaṃ tārenti etthāti kantāro, nirudako araññappadeso. Corādīhi adhiṭṭhitaaraññappadesāpi duggamanaṭṭhena taṃsadisatāya kantārātveva niruḷhāti sāmaññato ‘‘kantāraṃ tāretī’’ti vatvā taṃ vivaranto corakantārantiādimāha.
“世尊”一词,是从世尊那里(而来)的属格用法,意思是“从世尊那里听闻佛法”。就像“从和尚学习”这种说法一样,也可以理解为“在世尊近旁”。所谓“在声音中取了相”,意思是:由于过去诸佛出世时听闻正法所养成的串习,他在声音中把握到了这样的特征——“这就是法”。正是靠着过去的串习,像这类畜生——比如蝙蝠等——才会对闻法等生起净信。如果不是这样,那么一切畜生也都应该能同样生起净信了。假如真能生起,那么当世尊在无边的轮围世界中,能够在同一刹那以神通变化让一切众生都听闻佛法时,一切众生早就应该获得解脱了。然而,只有那些天人、人类、龙、金翅鸟等,本性就具备“业自作智”等素质的有情,即使先前没有近依止,也能通过听闻世尊的正法等,首先生起成为离转依止的净信;其他的则不能。应当这样理解。关于“哎呀,我也名叫……”,应当知道:只要观察“我从哪里生到这里”,从而知道自己是蛙身——仅仅“哎呀,我也名叫……”这一声惊叹本身就已经成立了,所以没有另外说出来。所谓“燃烧”,就是猛烈燃烧、闪闪发光。在“我是蛙”这首偈颂中,“在水中”是表明它出生的地方,这样就排除了它是旱地之蛙的可能。对于那些虽然生在水中、却像龟等一样也有陆地活动范围的,为了排除这种情况,所以说了“水行境”,意思是在水中游走。巴利
Bhagavatoti nissakke sāmivacanaṃ, bhagavantato dhammassavanenāti attho. Yathā ‘‘upajjhāyato ajjhetī’’ti, bhagavato santiketi vā attho. Sare nimittaṃ aggahesīti pubbabuddhuppādesu saddhammassavanaparicayena ‘‘dhammo eso vuccatī’’ti sare ākāraṃ gaṇhi. Pubbābhiyogavaseneva hi īdisānaṃ tiracchānānaṃ dhammassavanādīsu pasādo uppajjati vagguliādīnaṃ viya. Itarathā sabbatiracchānānampi tathā pasāduppattippasaṅgato. Yadi hi uppajjeyya, bhagavā anantacakkavāḷesu sabbasattānampi ekakkhaṇe sappāṭihāriyadhammaṃ sāvetuṃ sakkotīti sabbasattānampi ito pubbeva vimuttippasaṅgo siyā. Ye pana devamanussanāgasupaṇṇādayo pakatiyāva kammassakataññāṇādiyuttā honti, teyeva pubbe anupanissayāpi bhagavato saddhammassavanādinā paṭhamaṃ vivaṭṭūpanissayaṃ pasādaṃ uppādetuṃ sakkonti, na itareti gahetabbaṃ. Are ahampi nāmāti ettha ‘‘kutohaṃ idha nibbattoti oloketvā maṇḍūkabhāvatoti ñatvā’’ti idaṃ ettakampi are ahampi nāmāti vimhayavacaneneva sijjhatīti avuttanti veditabbaṃ. Jalanti jalanto vijjotamāno. Maṇḍūkohanti gāthāya udaketi sañjātaṭṭhānadassanaṃ, tena thalamaṇḍūkatā nivattanaṃ kataṃ hoti. Udake jātānampi kacchapādīnaṃ thalagocaratāpi atthīti taṃ nivattanatthaṃ ‘‘vārigocaro’’ti vuttaṃ, udakasañcārīti attho.
依解脱边际智来说:这里,能从一切烦恼中彻底解脱,所以叫解脱,也就是最高的道;那个道的终点,就是最高的果;安住在那里,就是解脱边际,它和一切知智一起,也就是全部的佛智。现在,为了说明正等觉这个词和佛陀这个词的差别,所以说了“或者因为……”等话。因为用正等觉这个词,说的是导师在证悟智慧方面的力量;而用佛陀这个词,则也说了他在教说智慧方面的力量,所以说“也令其他众生觉悟”等话。巴利
Vimokkhantikañāṇavasenāti ettha sabbaso kilesehi vimuccatīti vimokkho, aggamaggo, tassa anto, aggaphalaṃ, tattha bhavaṃ vimokkhantikaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ sabbampi buddhañāṇaṃ. Idāni sammāsambuddhapadato buddhapadassa visesaṃ dassetuṃ yasmā vātiādi vuttaṃ. Sammāsambuddhapadena hi satthu paṭivedhañāṇānubhāvo vutto, iminā pana buddhapadena desanāñāṇānubhāvopi, tenāha aññepi satte bodhesītiādi.
“功德殊胜、众生中最上、应受尊重之词”说的是:对那位具足戒等一切功德、因此成为一切众生中最上者、最值得尊重的尊者,出于尊重而说的这个词,就是“世尊”。“最胜”是指表达最胜的词,因为它与最胜的功德相伴。或者,“被说”就是词,也就是义,其义为“最胜”。“最上”在这里也是同样的道理。“具足尊重”中,尊重的状态就是尊重,或者因为具足尊重的功德而作的尊重就是尊重;由于具有与声闻等不共的、重大的尊重,所以是“具足尊重”。或者也可以这样搭配:因为他是世间一切众生的导师,所以是“尊”,并且因此具足尊重。巴利
Guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamagarugāravādhivacananti sabbehi sīlādiguṇehi visiṭṭhassa tato eva sabbasattehi uttamassa garuno gāravavasena vuccamānavacanamidaṃ bhagavāti. Seṭṭhanti seṭṭhavācakaṃ vacanaṃ seṭṭhaguṇasahacaraṇato. Atha vā vuccatīti vacanaṃ, attho, so seṭṭhoti attho. Uttamanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Garugāravayuttoti ettha garubhāvo gāravaṃ, garuguṇayogato garukaraṇaṃ vā gāravaṃ, tena sāvakādīnaṃ asādhāraṇatāya garubhūtena mahantena gāravena yuttoti garugāravayutto. Atha vā garu ca sabbalokassa sikkhakattā teneva gāravayutto cātipi yojetabbaṃ.
依状态而被了知,就是“依状态者”。同样,依特征而被了知,就是“依特征者”。从相状而来的,就是“从相状者”。不管什么相状,仅凭言说方式、不加考虑而说出的,就是“无因缘而生”,因此说“不考虑词义”。随自己的意愿而说出的,就是“随意者”。在这里,外在的棍杖等是特征,内在的三明等是相状。或者,多数人所见、容易看到的是特征,与此相反的则是相状,应当这样理解。所谓“亲证施设”,就是以亲证一切法为因的施设。或者,“亲证施设”就是依现量而成立的施设。因为这种施设是以那些功德为因的,而那些功德是导师现量亲证的,所以就像那些功德一样,这种施设也被称为“亲证”的,并不是对他人而言,只是随顺世俗言说而已,这是它的意趣。所谓“以功德为因的相状名称”,是指以那些作为因相的功德,这个名称就成了相状性的。说“他们说”,是因为法将(舍利弗)地位尊贵,所以用复数来说;或者是就结集者所作的传述而说。巴利
Avatthāya viditaṃ āvatthikaṃ. Evaṃ liṅgikaṃ. Nimittato āgataṃ nemittikaṃ. Adhicca yaṃkiñci nimittaṃ adhivacanavasena anapekkhitvā pavattaṃ adhiccasamuppannaṃ, tenāha ‘‘vacanatthamanapekkhitvā’’ti. Yadicchāya āgataṃ yādicchakaṃ. Ettha ca bāhiraṃ daṇḍādi liṅgaṃ, abbhantaraṃ tevijjādi nimittaṃ. Pacurajanavisayaṃ vā dissamānaṃ liṅgaṃ, tabbiparītaṃ nimittanti veditabbaṃ. Sacchikāpaññattīti sabbadhammānaṃ sacchikiriyānimittā paññatti. Atha vā sacchikāpaññattīti paccakkhasiddhā paññatti. Yaṃguṇanimittā hi sā, te guṇā satthu paccakkhabhūtāti guṇā viya sāpi sacchikatā eva nāma hoti, na paresaṃ, vohāramattenāti adhippāyo. Yaṃguṇanemittikanti yehi guṇehi nimittabhūtehi etaṃ nāmaṃ nemittikañca jātaṃ. Vadantīti dhammasenāpatissa garubhāvato bahuvacanenāha, saṅgītikārehi vā katamanuvādaṃ sandhāya.
拥有自在等种种“bhaga”(福分)的人,就是“bhagī”。他以戒行亲近、奉侍道果等圣者功德,以及林野等远离之处,所以叫“bhajī”。他是衣钵等资具之利、以及戒等功德的分享者和继承者,这就是这个词的意思。他用分别说、详说等方式把法宝分别开示出来,所以叫“vibhattavā”(分别说者)。他把贪等恶法破坏掉了,所以称为“bhagavā”(世尊)——这个道理在各处都是这样联系起来的。因为他在世间被尊为“bhagavā”,所以经文说“garū”(尊贵者);因为他尊贵,所以也就是“bhagavā”,这是意思所在。拥有那些被称为波罗蜜的“bhagya”(福德)的人,就是“bhagyavā”。以多种方式——也就是通过身修习等种种修习次第——他善加修习,所以叫“subhāvitattano”(善修习自性者);这里的“attano”是反身代词,意思是他的本性已善加修习。他已经到达诸有的尽头——涅槃,所以叫“bhavantago”(到有尽头者)。各处“bhagavā”这个词的构词成立,应当只按词源学的方法来理解。巴利
Issariyādibhedo bhago assa atthīti bhagī. Maggaphalādiariyaguṇaṃ araññādivivekaṭṭhānañca bhaji sevi sīlenāti bhajī. Cīvarādipaccayānaṃ attharasādīnañca sīlādiguṇānañca bhāgī, dāyādoti attho. Vibhaji uddesaniddesādippakārehi dhammaratanaṃ pavibhajīti vibhattavā. Rāgādipāpadhammaṃ bhaggaṃ akāsīti bhagavāti vuccatīti sabbattha sambandho. Garupi loke bhagavāti vuccatīti āha ‘‘garū’’ti, yasmā garu, tasmāpi bhagavāti attho. Pāramitāsaṅkhātaṃ bhagyamassa atthīti bhagyavā. Bahūhi ñāyehīti kāyabhāvanādikehi anekehi bhāvanākkamehi. Subhāvitattanoti paccatte etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ, tena subhāvitasabhāvoti attho. Bhavānaṃ antaṃ nibbānaṃ gatoti bhavantago. Tattha tattha bhagavāti saddasiddhi niruttinayeneva veditabbā.
现在,为了把“bhagī bhajī”这句释义偈颂里用九个词说明的意思,和“bhagyavā”这句偈颂里用六个词概括的意思,连同词的形成、释义搭配方式的种种差别一起展示出来,所以说了“然而这是另一种方法”等话。其中,在“音变”(vaṇṇavipariyaya)这个词里,“iti”这个字表示“等等”的意思,因此它涵盖了三种情况:音变、音删、以及与词根义相结合。所谓“依音韵方法”,就是依音韵规则来说。因为“pisodara”等词属于不规则类,所以说了“取pisodara等插入规则”。插入本身就是一种规则,因为被归入那一类就是插入。“bhagya”的意思是善巧。巴利
Idāni bhagī bhajīti niddesagāthāya navahi padehi dassitamatthaṃ bhagyavāti gāthāya chahi padehi saṅgahetvā padasiddhiṃ atthayojanānayabhedehi saddhiṃ dassetuṃ ayaṃ pana aparo nayotiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha vaṇṇavipariyayoti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, teneva vaṇṇavikāro vaṇṇalopo dhātuatthena niyojanañcāti imaṃ tividhaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Saddanayenāti saddalakkhaṇanayena. Pisodarādīnaṃ saddānaṃ ākatigaṇabhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘pisodarādipakkhepalakkhaṇaṃ gahetvā’’ti. Pakkhipanameva lakkhaṇaṃ. Tappariyāpannatākaraṇañhi pakkhipanaṃ. Bhagyanti kusalaṃ.
贪等四种,是单独算的;无惭等,则是成对算的。像“他骂过我”这类念头反复生起,使心被愤怒蒙蔽,这就是愤恨。抹掉别人先前对自己做过的好事,这种心态叫覆。跟多闻的人等硬要争个高下,把自己摆到跟对方一样的位置,这叫攀比。掩盖自己确实存在的过失,这叫谄。宣扬自己根本没有的优点,这叫诳。对应该尊敬的人还顽固不化、不肯低头,这叫骄。以压过别人为特征,这叫狂。靠出身等抬高自己,这是慢。极度抬高自己,这是过慢。靠出身等而陶醉,那种状态就是慢,也叫沉醉。这有二十七种。在种种欲乐上放任自心,这叫放逸。身恶行等,是三种恶行。依渴爱和邪见而起的恶行,是三种杂染。贪、嗔、痴就是垢。它们以及身恶行等,是三种违逆。欲想、害想、嗔想,叫三种想。它们也就是寻。渴爱、邪见、慢,是戏论。把不净执为净、把苦执为乐、把无常执为常、把无我执为我,这四种颠倒。欲等是邪行。对衣等资具生贪,是四种渴爱之取。对佛、法、僧、学处有疑惑,对同梵行者有愤怒,是五种心秽。在欲、身、色上还没有离贪,吃饱了就耽著睡眠等快乐,以及为了投生到某个天界而修梵行,这是五种心缚。对色的欢喜等,是五种欢喜。嗔、覆、嫉、诳、恶欲、邪欲、见取,是六种诤根。色渴爱等,是六种渴爱身。邪见等,是八道支的反面,即种种邪性。缘于渴爱而有追求,缘于追求而有获得,缘于获得而有决断,缘于决断而有欲贪,缘于欲贪而有执著,缘于执著而有占有,缘于占有而有悭吝,缘于悭吝而有守护,由于守护而拿起刀杖等,生起种种不善聚——这就是九种以渴爱为根本的法。杀生等,是十种不善业道。四种常见、同样四种部分常见、无边论、诡辩、两种无因论、十六种有想论、八种无想论、八种非想非非想论、七种断灭论、五种现法涅槃论——这些是六十二种邪见。色渴爱等六种渴爱,每一种又分为欲渴爱、有渴爱、无有渴爱,就成了十八种;再按在内在和外在的色等上生起,就成了三十六种;再按过去、未来、现在三时来分,就成了八种一百零八种渴爱行。把“差别”这个词分别搭配上去,用“贪的差别”等来组合。所谓“一切热恼的十万烦恼”,是指一切众生中名为热恼、能令热恼的烦恼,数量众多,有十万之多;按所缘等和生起方式等来分,应当知道它们有这样的差别。关联起来就是:他摧毁了五种魔。所谓“诸危险”,就是种种灾祸。巴利
Lobhādayo cattāro dosā ekakavasena gahitā. Ahirikādayo dukavasena. Akkocchimantiādinā (dha. pa. 3-4) punappunaṃ kujjhanavasena cittapariyonandhano kodhova upanāho. Paresaṃ pubbakāritālakkhaṇassa guṇassa nipuñchano makkho nāma. Bahussutādīhi saddhiṃ yugaggāho attano samakaraṇaṃ palāso. Attano vijjamānadosapaṭicchādanā māyā. Avijjamānaguṇappakāsanaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ. Garūsupi thaddhatā anonatatā thambho. Taduttarikaraṇalakkhaṇo sārambho. Jātiādiṃ nissāya unnatilakkhaṇo māno. Abbhunnatilakkhaṇo atimāno. Jātiādiṃ nissāya majjanākārappatto mānova mado nāma. So sattavīsatividho. Kāmaguṇesu cittassa vossaggo pamādo. Kāyaduccaritādīni tividhaduccaritāni. Taṇhādiṭṭhiduccaritavasena tividhasaṃkilesā. Rāgadosamohāva malāni. Teyeva kāyaduccaritādayo ca tividhavisamāni. Kāmabyāpādavihiṃsāsaññā tividhasaññā nāma. Teyeva vitakkā. Taṇhādiṭṭhimānā papañcā. Subhasukhaniccaattavipariyesā catubbidhavipariyesā. Chandādayo agati. Cīvarādīsu paccayesu lobhā cattāro taṇhupādā. Buddhadhammasaṅghasikkhāsu kaṅkhā, sabrahmacārīsu kopo ca pañca cetokhīlā. Kāme kāye rūpe ca avītarāgatā, yāvadatthaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhādianuyogo, aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ paṇidhāya brahmacariyacaraṇañca pañca cetovinibandhā. Rūpābhinandanādayo pañca abhinandanā. Kodhamakkhaissāsāṭheyyapāpicchatāsandiṭṭhiparāmāsā cha vivādamūlāni. Rūpataṇhādayo cha taṇhākāyā. Micchādiṭṭhiādayo aṭṭhamaggaṅgapaṭipakkhā micchattā. Taṇhaṃ paṭicca pariyesanā, pariyesanaṃ paṭicca lābho, lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo, taṃ paṭicca chandarāgo, taṃ paṭicca ajjhosānaṃ, taṃ paṭicca pariggaho, taṃ paṭicca macchariyaṃ, taṃ paṭicca ārakkhā, ārakkhādhikaraṇaṃ daṇḍādānādianekākusalarāsīti nava taṇhāmūlakā dhammā. Pāṇātipātādayo dasa akusalakammapathā. Cattāro sassatavādā tathā ekaccasassatavādā antānantikā amarāvikkhepikā dve adhiccasamuppannikā soḷasa saññīvādā aṭṭha asaññīvādā aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā satta ucchedavādā pañca diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti etāni dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni. Rūpataṇhādichataṇhā eva paccekaṃ kāmataṇhābhavataṇhāvibhavataṇhāvasena aṭṭhārasa honti, tā ajjhattabahiddharūpādīsu pavattivasena chattiṃsa, puna kālattayavasena aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni honti. Pabheda-saddaṃ paccekaṃ sambandhitvā lobhappabhedotiādinā yojetabbaṃ. Sabbadarathapariḷāhakilesasatasahassānīti sabbāni sattānaṃ darathasaṅkhātapariḷāhakarāni kilesānaṃ anekāni satasahassāni, ārammaṇādivibhāgato pavattiākāravibhāgato ca nesaṃ evaṃ pabhedo veditabbo. Pañca māre abhañjīti sambandho. Parissayānanti upaddavānaṃ.
像这样,把“bhagyavā”和“bhaggavā”这两个词的含义分别解释之后,现在为了显示这两个词所包含的意义,所以说了“以具有bhagyavantā故”等话。其中,“具足百福相之特征者”,就是指具足由无数百种福所生的大士相——也就是世尊。所谓“于自心自在”,就是指对于不净等所缘,生起“非不净想”等,以及通过心定,使自己的心达到自主状态。在“小、轻”等中,用“等”这个字,把大、到达、极至、威势、如意、至终这六个也一并包括了。其中,使身体变得微小,是小;因为能以脚行走于虚空等,具备这种能力而轻快,是轻;使身体变得巨大,是大;到达所喜欢的地方,是到达;通过决意等使所愿成就,是极至;自己能够自主,是威势;在神变方面能够自主,是如意;无论是行走于虚空,还是做其他什么事,在任何地方都能达到究竟,是至终——也有人说这是“如见童子形等”。“一切肢分的光辉”,就是一切肢分的庄严。“成就”一词随顺而说。容易成办的是当时所愿,难成办的是经过长时间才能实现的菩提等。因为具有“bhaga”,所以是bhagavā——这是依照文法论的方式成立的。其余一切,也应当知道是依照文法论的方式成立的。巴利
Evaṃ bhagyavā bhaggavāti dvinnaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ vibhajitvā idāni tehi dvīhi gahitamatthaṃ dassetuṃ bhagyavantatāya cassātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha satapuññajalakkhaṇadharassāti anekasatapuññanibbattamahāpurisalakkhaṇadharassa bhagavato. Sakacitte issariyaṃ nāma paṭikkūlādīsu appaṭikkūlasaññitādivasappavattiyā ceva cetosamādhivasena ca attano cittassa vasībhāvāpādanameva. Aṇimā laghimādikanti ādi-saddena mahimā patti pākammaṃ īsitā vasitā yatthakāmāvasāyitāti ime chapi saṅgahitā. Tattha kāyassa aṇubhāvakaraṇaṃ aṇimā. Ākāse padasā gamanādiarahabhāvena lahubhāvo laghimā. Kāyassa mahantatāpādanaṃ mahimā. Iṭṭhadesassa pāpuṇanaṃ patti. Adhiṭṭhānādivasena icchitatthanipphādanaṃ pākammaṃ. Sayaṃvasitā issarabhāvo īsitā. Iddhividhe vasībhāvo vasitā. Ākāsena vā gacchato, aññaṃ vā kiñci karoto yattha katthaci vosānappatti yatthakāmāvasāyitā, ‘‘kumārakarūpādidassana’’ntipi vadanti. Sabbaṅgapaccaṅgasirīti sabbesaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ sobhā. Atthīti anuvattati. Lahusādhanaṃ taṃ taṃ kālikaṃ icchitaṃ, garusādhanaṃ cirakālikaṃ buddhattādipatthitaṃ . Bhagā assa santīti bhagavāti idaṃ saddasatthanayena siddhaṃ, sesaṃ sabbaṃ niruttinayena siddhanti veditabbaṃ.
在“压迫之义、有为之义、烧恼之义、变坏之义”等当中,应当把“义”这个词分别与每一项搭配,说成“压迫之义”“有为之义”等等。其中,以自身的本性来说,以压迫为特征的,就是苦。它的那个“义”本身就是压迫,所以叫做“压迫之义”,这就是它的自性。又因为它是被它的集所造作的,所以通过见集,就显出“有为之义”。又因为道能断除烦恼的烧恼,所以极为清凉,因此通过见道,依它与烧恼相对立,就显出“烧恼之义”。而通过见不变坏的灭,就显出“变坏之义”。对于同一个自性法,由于从它自身的自性来说,以及从它排除其余三谛来说,可以这样分别安立,所以说有四种义。至于集,由于是堆积而成,所以它的自性就是“积集之义”;通过见苦,就显出“因缘之义”。通过见离系的灭,就显出“系缚之义”。通过见作为出离的道,就显出“障碍之义”。巴利
Pīḷanasaṅkhatasantāpavipariṇāmaṭṭhenātiādīsu pīḷanaṭṭho saṅkhataṭṭhotiādinā attha-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Tattha attano sabhāvena pīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ dukkhaṃ. Tassa yo pīḷanameva attho ‘‘pīḷanaṭṭho’’ti vuccati, so sabhāvo. Yasmā pana taṃsamudayena saṅkhataṃ, tasmā saṅkhataṭṭho samudayadassanena āvibhūto. Yasmā ca maggo kilesasantāpaharattā susītalo, tasmāssa maggadassanena santāpaṭṭho āvibhūto tappaṭiyogattā. Avipariṇāmadhammassa pana nirodhassa dassanena vipariṇāmaṭṭho āvibhūtoti. Ekasseva sabhāvadhammassa sakabhāvato itarasaccattayanivattito ca parikappetabbattā cattāro atthā vuttā. Samudayassa pana rāsikaraṇato āyūhanaṭṭho sabhāvo, tasseva dukkhadassanena nidānaṭṭho āvibhūto. Visaṃyogabhūtassa nirodhassa dassanena saṃyogaṭṭho. Niyyānabhūtassa maggassa dassanena palibodhaṭṭho āvibhūto.
灭的自性就是“出离义”,通过观见集,就显出“远离义”。通过观见有为的道,就显出“无为义”;或者通过观见属于所缘境的、会死的苦,就显出“不死义”。道的自性就是“出离义”,通过观见集,就显出“这正是苦的因”这个“因义”——为了达到涅槃,这正是因,所以叫“因义”;通过观见极微细的灭,就显出“就在这里观见”的“见义”;通过观见更殊胜的苦,就显出“增上义”。这些就被称为压迫等十六种行相。巴利
Nirodhassa pana nissaraṇaṭṭho sabhāvo, tasseva samudayadassanena vivekaṭṭho āvibhūto. Saṅkhatassa maggassa dassanena asaṅkhataṭṭho, visayabhūtassa maraṇadhammassa vā dukkhassa dassanena amataṭṭho. Maggassa pana niyyānaṭṭho sabhāvo, tasseva samudayadassanena dukkhassevāyaṃ hetu, nibbānappattiyā pana ayameva hetūti hetvaṭṭho, atisukhumanirodhadassanena idhameva dassananti dassanaṭṭho, adhikapaṇassa dukkhassa dassanena adhipateyyaṭṭho āvibhūto. Ete eva ca pīḷanādayo soḷasa ākārāti vuccanti.
远离诸欲,就是身体远离。远离诸盖等而证得的八种等至,就是心远离。所谓“执取”,是指众生在此执取各自果报的所依,也就是五欲功德所摄的欲蕴、烦恼和行作。远离这四种执取的涅槃,就叫作执取远离。巴利
Kāmehi vivekaṭṭhakāyatā kāyaviveko. Nīvaraṇādīhi vivittā aṭṭha samāpattiyo cittaviveko. Upadhīyanti ettha yathāsakaṃ phalānīti upadhayo, pañcakāmaguṇasaṅkhātakāmakhandhakilesaabhisaṅkhārā, tehi catūhi vivittaṃ nibbānaṃ upadhiviveko nāma.
通过无我随观所获得的圣道,以及通过苦随观和无常随观所获得的圣道,按照它们生起的顺序,依次获得空解脱、无愿解脱、无相解脱这三种名称。因为这种解脱确实是从烦恼中脱离出来的,所以就叫作“解脱”。巴利
Anattānupassanāya paṭiladdho dukkhāniccānupassanāhi ca paṭiladdho ariyamaggo āgamanavasena yathākkamaṃ suññataappaṇihitaanimittavimokkhasaññaṃ paṭilabhati, kilesehi vimuttattā hi esa vimokkhoti.
就像在世间,人们从每个词里各取一个音节,拼成“mekhalā”(腰带)这个说法一样,这里也是如此,这就是它的意思。“Mehanassa”指的是隐秘部位。“Khassa”指的是空间。巴利
Yathā loke ekekapadato ekekamakkharaṃ gahetvā ‘‘mekhalā’’ti vuttaṃ, evamidhāpīti attho. Mehanassāti guyhappadesassa. Khassāti okāsassa.
在“与诸天一起”等说法中,“与诸天一起存在”就是“有诸天的世间”。应当这样理解它与“那个有诸天的……”等语句的连接。“以有诸天这个词”是指:以作为“有诸天”一词的修饰成分而存在的“诸天”一词。因为“诸天”也包含在“有诸天”这个词里面,所以这是用部分来代替整体的借代说法。如果不是这样,那就只会取“诸天所殊胜的世间”,五欲界天就不会被包含进来,上面也是如此。以“有魔”这个词,通过“魔”这个音,也包含了与魔共处的所有他化自在天,所以说“包含第六欲界天”。“梵类诸天”是指初禅地的天众。以他们为首,直到无色界为止的诸梵天,对这些梵天的包含,就是包含梵类诸天等梵天。因为“世间”一词也通用于器世间等,所以这里只取有情世间所特有的“生类”来包含,因此说“以生类一词包含有情世间”。以“有诸天”等词包含了化生天,以“有沙门”一词包含了清净殊胜天,所以说“以有诸天有人一词,包含假名天和其余的人”。其中,假名天就是国王,其余的人就是假名天、沙门、婆罗门以外的人。因为有情世间所特有的“生类”一词已被单独取出,所以“有诸天的世间”这里的“世间”一词只限定为器世间,因此说“以三个词指器世间”。这也是根据“有诸天”等三个词所表达的主要含义来说的。但这里应当知道,作为器世间的修饰语,也包含了诸天、魔等有情世间,因为从能力上可以推知,就像“带着儿子一起来”等说法中,儿子等也被包含在内一样。在这个解释方式中,应当把“有诸天、有魔、有梵、器世间、有沙门婆罗门、有诸天有人、生类”这些词用“以及”连接起来理解。而且在这里,通过取器世间和有情世间,以这两者为施设基础的行世间,也因不离这两者而被取到了,应当这样理解。不过另有一些人说:“以‘有诸天’等五个词,只是把有情世间用它自身所含的诸天等修饰成分加以限定后取出来;取了它,也就取到了它所依住的器世间,以及以这两者为施设对象的行世间。”他们认为,“生类”这个词应当作为“世间”一词的修饰语,然后连接为“有诸天的生类世间……有诸天有人的生类世间”。巴利
Sahadevehītiādīsu saha devehi vattatīti sadevako loko. Taṃ sadevakantiādinā yojanā veditabbā. Sadevakavacanenāti sadevaka-sadde visesanabhāvena ṭhitadevavacanena. Tassāpi sadevakapade antobhūtattā avayave samudāyopacāravasena vohāro kato. Itarathā tena devavisiṭṭhalokasseva gahaṇato pañcakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ na siyā, evaṃ uparipi. Samārakavacanena mārasaddena tena sahacaritā sabbe vasavattidevā ca gahitāti āha ‘‘chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇa’’nti. Brahmakāyikā nāma paṭhamajjhānabhūmikā. Te ādi yesaṃ āruppapariyantānaṃ brahmānaṃ tesaṃ brahmānaṃ gahaṇaṃ brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇaṃ. Loka-saddassa okāsalokādīnampi sādhāraṇattā sattalokāveṇikameva pajāgahaṇaṃ katanti āha ‘‘pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇa’’nti. Sadevakādivacanena upapattidevānaṃ, sassamaṇavacanena visuddhidevānañca gahitattā āha ‘‘sadevamanussavacanena sammutidevaavasesamanussaggahaṇa’’nti. Tattha sammutidevā rājāno, avasesamanussā sammutidevasamaṇabrāhmaṇehi avasiṭṭhā. Sattalokāveṇikassa pajāsaddassa visuṃ gahitattā sadevakaṃ lokanti ettha lokasaddaggahaṇaṃ okāsalokameva niyametīti āha ‘‘tīhi padehi okāsaloko’’ti. Idañca sadevakādipadattayavacanīyassa padhānatthassa vasena vuttaṃ. Okāsalokavisesanassa panettha devamārādisattalokassāpi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ sāmatthiyato gamyamānattā saputto āgatotiādīsu puttādīnaṃ viya. Imasmiñca naye sadevakaṃ samārakaṃ sabrahmakaṃ okāsalokaṃ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ sadevamanussaṃ pajañcāti ca-kāraṃ ānetvā yojetabbaṃ, okāsasattalokānaṃ gahaṇena cettha tadubhayasammutinimittabhūto saṅkhāralokopi tadavinābhāvato gahito evāti daṭṭhabbo. Apare pana ‘‘sadevakantiādīhi pañcahi padehi sattalokova attano avayavabhūtadevādivisesanehi visesetvā gahito, taggahaṇena tadādhāro okāsaloko, tadubhayapaññattivisayo saṅkhāraloko ca gahitā eva hontī’’ti vadanti. Tesañca pajanti idaṃ lokasaddassa visesanaṃ katvā sadevakaṃ pajaṃ lokaṃ…pe… sadevamanussaṃ pajaṃ lokanti yojetabbaṃ.
无色界世间已经被包含在内,因为剩下的部分由其他词句涵盖。通过“魔”的包含,那些以魔为首的众生以及与之相似的化生天众也被纳入,所以说“六欲界天世间”。在刹帝利众、婆罗门众、居士众、沙门众、四大王天众、三十三天众、魔众、梵天众这八众当中,四大王天众等四众已经被“有天”等词句所涵盖,因此这里用“有沙门、婆罗门”来指沙门众和婆罗门众,用“有天、有人”来指刹帝利众和居士众,所以说“依四众而说”。与此相关联的是“人世间已被包含”。其中,“人世间”指人群,因此说“或者其余一切有情世间”。巴利
Arūpāvacaraloko gahito pārisesañāyena itaresaṃ padantarehi gahitattā. Māraggahaṇena tappadhānā taṃsadisā ca upapattidevā saṅgayhantīti āha ‘‘chakāmāvacaradevaloko’’ti. Khattiyaparisā brāhmaṇagahapatisamaṇacātumahārājikatāvatiṃsamārabrahmaparisāti imāsu aṭṭhasu parisāsu cātumahārājikādīnaṃ catunnaṃ parisānaṃ sadevakādipadehi saṅgahitattā idha sassamaṇabrāhmaṇinti iminā samaṇaparisā brāhmaṇaparisā ca, sadevamanussanti iminā khattiyaparisā gahapatiparisā ca vuttāti āha ‘‘catuparisavasenā’’ti. Tassa manussaloko gahitoti iminā sambandho. Tattha manussalokoti manussasamūho, tenāha ‘‘avasesasabbasattaloko vā’’ti.
为了说明另一种解释方式,他说:“或者与假名天一起的人世间。”用“天”这个词包含了假名天,用“沙门、婆罗门、人”这些词包含了其余的人。这样一来,在两种解释方式中,都是用“人”这个词来限定“生类”这个词,构成“人这类众生”“人类众生”,然后它又与天一起存在,所以叫“有天”,即“生类”。它既“有天”又是“人”,所以叫“有天有人”,也就是那个“有天有人的生类”。再者,为了让它成为“有沙门、婆罗门”的,应当这样分析词义:要让“生类”这个词只指人,否则单指人就无法成立,因为一切人都已经被作为限定成分涵盖进去了,不存在任何作为其他词义的人。现在,为了表明用“生类”这个词也能把其余的龙等有情包含进来,他说:“或者其余一切有情世间。”在这里也应当这样连接理解:依四众来说的其余一切有情世间,或者与假名天和人一起的其余一切有情世间。巴利
Vikappantaraṃ dassento āha ‘‘sammutidevehi vā saha manussaloko’’ti. Devapadena sammutidevā, samaṇabrāhmaṇamanussapadehi sesamanussā ca gahitāti evaṃ vikappadvayepi manussaṃ pajaṃ manussiṃ pajanti pajā-saddaṃ manussa-saddena visesetvā taṃ puna saha devehi vattatīti sadevā, pajā. Sadevā ca sā manussā cāti sadevamanussā, taṃ sadevamanussaṃ pajaṃ. Puna kiṃ bhūtaṃ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇinti evaṃ yathā pajāsaddena manussānaññeva gahaṇaṃ siyā, tathā nibbacanaṃ kātabbaṃ, itarathā manussānaññeva gahaṇaṃ na sampajjati sabbamanussānaṃ visesanabhāvena gahitattā aññapadatthabhūtassa kassaci manussassa abhāvā. Idāni pajanti iminā avasesanāgādisattepi saṅgahetvā dassetukāmo āha ‘‘avasesasabbasattaloko vā’’ti. Etthāpi catuparisavasena avasesasabbasattaloko sammutidevamanussehi vā saha avasesasabbasattalokoti yojetabbaṃ.
到这一步,已经按部分把握了世间、说明了由旬,现在要用每一个词、无遗漏地把握一切世间,从这个角度说明每一个限定语各自都能产生效果,所以说“而且在这里”等话。“以最上为量”:名声这个词,通过作为它自身一部分的“有天”这个词,让听到的人自己知道,它属于最上的、归入天趣的、有限定的、可认知的范围,这样它就传扬开来,应当这样连接理解。“随顺次第”是指义和词的随顺次第,也就是认知的次第,这是它的含义。巴利
Ettāvatā bhāgaso lokaṃ gahetvā yojanaṃ dassetvā idāni ekekapadena abhāgaso sabbalokānaṃ gahaṇapakkhepi tassa tassa visesanassa sapphalataṃ dassetuṃ api cetthātiādi vuttaṃ. Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedatoti ukkaṭṭhānaṃ devagatipariyāpannānaṃ paricchinnavasena jānanavasena kittisaddo sayaṃ attano avayavabhūtena sadevakavacanena taṃ suṇantānaṃ sāvento abbhuggatoti yojanā. Anusandhikkamoti atthānañceva padānañca anusandhānakkamo, jānanakkamoti attho.
“Abhiññā”这个词,因为删去了ya字母,所以称作“abhiññāyā”。所谓“普贤性”,就是一切部分都善美。“教法”是指能开示行道与证道之教的教理法。由于佛陀的善觉性,这三句是就法的因、自性、果来说的;同样,“依怙所生”等三句也是这样。中间两组三句应当知道是只就果来说的。“事净”是指听闻法之后依照所闻而修行的人们,他们以善行道为本质的事净。巴利
Abhiññāti ya-kāralopena niddesoti āha ‘‘abhiññāyā’’ti. Samantabhadrakattāti sabbabhāgehi sundarattā. Sāsanadhammoti paṭipattipaṭivedhasāsanassa pakāsako pariyattidhammo. Buddhasubodhitatāyāti idaṃ tikaṃ dhammassa hetusarūpaphalavasena vuttaṃ, tathā nāthapabhavattikampi. Majjhe tikadvayaṃ phalavaseneva vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Kiccasuddhiyāti dhammaṃ sutvā yathāsutavasena paṭipajjantānaṃ suppaṭipattisaṅkhātakiccasuddhiyā.
现在,世尊在宣说初善等行相的法时,为听众开示了教梵行和道梵行。为了表明“梵行”这个词是带着“有义”等词作为修饰语来说的,而不是修饰“法”这个词,并且想通过这个角度从多方面阐明它的含义,所以说了“有义、有文”等开头的话。其中,三学和全部经教法称为教梵行。因为世尊说法时,就像开示戒等一样,也开示能说明它们的经教法,这是因为教理法具备声义总聚的缘故。“随宜”就是如其所应。含摄三学的教梵行和道梵行,因为具足义利而成为义成就,又因为具足应当次第证得的殊胜义利,所以与义、与目的相应而行,因此只是“有义”,而不是“有文”。而称为经教法的教梵行,则依前面所说的义而“有义”且“有文”。即使吉罗多等蛮族语言也有义有文,但为了简别殊胜的义与文的结合,就像说“有手、提婆达多、有耳”那样,所以说“有义、有文”,并解释道:“由义成就而为有义,由文成就而为有文”。其中,听闻某个义之后如理而行能到达一切苦的灭尽,这样的成就名为义成就,就是义具足的意思。文成就,就是具备松音、紧音等文句圆满的摩揭陀自性语,能将甚深义显了示出的能力,就是文句具足的意思。巴利
Idāni ādikalyāṇādippakārameva dhammaṃ desento bhagavā sotūnaṃ yaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ maggabrahmacariyañca pakāseti, tappakāsakassa brahmacariyapadassa sātthantiādīni padāni visesanabhāvena vuttāni, na dhammapadassāti dassanamukhena nānappakārato atthaṃ vivaritukāmo sātthaṃ sabyañjananti evamādīsu panātiādimāha. Tattha tisso sikkhā sakalo ca tantidhammo sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ nāma. Bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento sīlādike viya tappakāsakaṃ tantidhammampi pakāseti eva saddatthasamudāyattā pariyattidhammassa. Yathānurūpanti yathārahaṃ. Sikkhattayasaṅgahitañhi sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ maggabrahmacariyañca atthasampattiyā sampannatthatāya, uparūpari adhigantabbavisesasaṅkhātaatthasampattiyā ca saha atthena payojanena vattatīti sātthameva, na tu sabyañjanaṃ, tantidhammasaṅkhātaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ yathāvuttena atthena sātthaṃ sabyañjanañca. Kirātādimilakkhavacanānampi sātthasabyañjanatte samānepi visiṭṭhatthabyañjanayogaṃ sandhāya sahattho devadatto savittotiādi viya ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjana’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ, byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjana’’nti. Tattha yaṃ atthaṃ sutvā tathā paṭipajjantā sabbadukkhakkhayaṃ pāpuṇanti, tassa tādisasampatti atthasampatti nāma, sampannatthatāti attho. Byañjanasampatti nāma sithiladhanitādibyañjanaparipuṇṇāya māgadhikāya sabhāvaniruttiyā gambhīrampi atthaṃ uttānaṃ katvā dassanasamatthatā sampannabyañjanatāti attho.
现在,为了也按照《指导论》的方法(《指导论》第4品第12句)来显示义理,所以说了“略示”等话。其中,从简略的角度说,令知、令显现,就是“略示”,这个意思应当从业成就的角度来看待,其余几个词也是这样。第一,“说”就是“开示”。这两者都是被称为总说义语的广说之词。已经说过一次又再说,就是“开显”和“分别”。这两者都是详说义语。对已开显的作更广的说明,对已分别的以各种方式令知,就是“显了”和“施设”。这两者都是被称为复详说义语的广说之词。由于与义句相应,就是说前面所说的六个词,因为教理中分析义理的缘故而成为义句,由于与它们共俱、与义藏相应的缘故,这就是意思。在未完结的词中,处于开头或中间的音,就是字母,单一字母或词也是字母。带语尾的词是句。能显了句所诠之义的就是文,即语句。对已说之义以多种方式作分别,名为行相。对行相所诠者作词源解释,就是词解。词解之义的广说,就是详释。或者,依照“以字母略示,以句开示,以文开显,以行相分别,以词解显了,以详释施设”这一说法,称为略示、开示的总说义能诠之语,名为字母与句;称为开显、分别的详说义能诠之语,名为文与行相;称为显了、施设的复详说义能诠之语,名为词解与详释。由于这些的成就,所以是“有文”的意思。巴利
Idāni nettippakaraṇanayenāpi (netti 4 dvādasapada) atthaṃ dassetuṃ saṅkāsanātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅkhepato kāsīyati dīpīyatīti saṅkāsananti kammasādhanavasena attho daṭṭhabbo, evaṃ sesesupi. Paṭhamaṃ kāsanaṃ pakāsanaṃ. Ubhayampetaṃ uddesatthavacanasaṅkhātassa vitthāravacanaṃ. Sakiṃ vuttassa puna vacanañca vivaraṇavibhajanāni. Ubhayampetaṃ niddesatthavacanaṃ. Vivaṭassa vitthāratarābhidhānaṃ vibhattassa ca pakārehi ñāpanaṃ uttānīkaraṇapaññattiyo. Ubhayampetaṃ paṭiniddesatthavacanasaṅkhātassa vitthāravacanaṃ. Atthapadasamāyogatoti yathāvuttāni eva cha padāni pariyattiyā atthavibhāgattā atthapadāni, tehi sahitatāya atthakoṭṭhāsayuttattāti attho. Apariyosite pade ādimajjhagatavaṇṇo akkharaṃ, ekakkharaṃ, padaṃ vā akkharaṃ. Vibhattiyantaṃ padaṃ. Padābhihitaṃ atthaṃ byañjetīti byañjanaṃ, vākyaṃ. Kathitassevatthassa anekavidhena vibhāgakaraṇaṃ ākāro nāma. Ākārābhihitassa nibbacanaṃ nirutti. Nibbacanatthavitthāro niddeso. Atha vā ‘‘akkharehi saṅkāseti, padehi pakāseti, byañjanehi vivarati, ākārehi vibhajati, niruttīhi uttāniṃ karoti, niddesehi paññapetī’’ti vacanato saṅkāsanapakāsanasaṅkhaātauddesatthavācakāni vacanāni akkharapadāni nāma. Vivaraṇavibhajanasaṅkhātaniddesatthavācakāni vacanāni byañjanākārā nāma. Uttānīkaraṇapaññattisaṅkhātapaṭiniddesatthavācakāni vacanāni niruttiniddesā nāma, tesaṃ sampattiyā sabyañjananti attho.
在“义甚深”等说法里,“义”指的是经教里的义理,或者指因和果。“法”指的是经教,或者指因。“开示”指的是按照法来说法。“通达”指的是对前面说的义等能够没有颠倒地理解。不过这些义等,就像大海对兔子之类一样,对智慧迟钝的人来说很难深入、也难以立足,所以说是甚深。其中,通达也是依靠义、和义同类的,所以说“由义甚深和通达甚深而是有义的”。法和开示虽然也依靠义,但它们本身就是文句的形态,所以说“由法甚深和开示甚深而是有文的”。在前面说的义等当中,各种分别的智慧就是义无碍解等。其中,“词解”就是择取经教的词句而说,意思是词源解释。在三种无碍解当中,那种智慧就是辩无碍解。世间人只是通过可信之言这个途径对义生起信心,而不是通过义本身的途径,所以说“由可信”等。“唯”这个词是“全体”的同义词,所以说“以全体圆满的状态”。这里的“梵行”一词,表示含摄三种学处的全部教法,所以说“由摄持三种学处”等。巴利
Atthagambhīratātiādīsu attho nāma tantiattho, hetuphalaṃ vā. Dhammo nāma tanti, hetu vā. Desanā nāma yathādhammaṃ dhammābhilāpo. Paṭivedho nāma yathāvuttaatthādīnaṃ aviparītāvabodho. Te panete atthādayo yasmā sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo mandabuddhīhi dukkhogāhā alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Tesu paṭivedhassāpi atthasannissitattā atthasabhāgattā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘atthagambhīratāpaṭivedhagambhīratāhi sāttha’’nti. Dhammadesanānaṃ atthasannissitattepi sayaṃ byañjanarūpattā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammagambhīratādesanāgambhīratāhi sabyañjana’’nti. Yathāvuttaatthādīsu pabhedagatāni ñāṇāni atthapaṭisambhidādayo. Tattha niruttīti tantipadānaṃ niddhāretvā vacanaṃ, nibbacananti attho. Tīsu paṭisambhidāsu ñāṇaṃ paṭibhānapaṭisambhidā. Lokiyā saddheyyavacanamukheneva atthesu pasīdanti, na atthamukhenāti āha saddheyyatotiādi. Kevalasaddo sakalādhivacananti āha ‘‘sakalaparipuṇṇabhāvenā’’ti. Brahmacariya-saddo idha sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sakalaṃ sāsanaṃ dīpetīti āha sikkhattayapariggahitattātiādi.
为了用另一种方式说明前面已经讲过的内容,所以又说“再者”等等。其中,“有因缘的”是指带有说明说法地点、时间等的因缘话语。“有事由的”是指具备事由等理由。这里经文的连接顺序是这样的:他听说“毗兰若婆罗门听说:‘沙门……住’”,又听说“那位乔达摩尊者的好名声这样传开:‘他就是……宣说’”,又听说“他开示法……开头善、中间善、结尾善,开示时阐明具备义理、文句等功德的梵行”,又听说“见到那样的阿拉汉确实是好的”;听了之后,毗兰若婆罗门就前往世尊那里。巴利
Yathāvuttamevatthaṃ aparenāpi pariyāyena dassetuṃ api cātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sanidānanti desakālādidīpakena nidānavacanena sanidānaṃ. Sauppattikanti aṭṭhuppattiādiyuttiyuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ pāḷiyojanākkamo – ‘‘verañjo brāhmaṇo samaṇo khalu bho…pe… viharatī’’ti ca, ‘‘taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ ‘itipi so…pe… pavedetī’ti evaṃ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato’’ti ca, ‘‘so dhammaṃ deseti…pe… pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ, desento ca sātthasabyañjanādiguṇasaṃyuttaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetī’’ti ca, ‘‘sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṃ arahataṃ dassanaṃ hotī’’ti ca assosi, sutvā ca atha kho verañjo brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti.
不过在注释书里,虽然“仅仅见到也是好的”这样表述,是就婆罗门内心思惟的方式而说的,因此“他阐明梵行”这一句之后,似乎应当紧接着连接“他听说”这个词;但是,因为“见到那样的人确实是好的”这句话是由“iti”一词限定、以显示前面所说的例证之义而说的,而且在别处看不到这个“iti”词,又因为“那时毗兰若……”等语是以显示应做之事的方式,让经文转入另一种表述,所以还是按照前面所说的方式,把“他听说”这个词移到“见到那样的阿拉汉确实是好的”之后来连接,才是妥当的。应当这样理解:注释书作者为了显示婆罗门是根据自己听闻而生起意欲,通过说明他前往的动机,才说了“心想‘仅仅见到也是好的’而生起意欲”等话。巴利
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana kiñcāpi ‘‘dassanamattampi sādhu hotīti evaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ katvā atha kho verañjo…pe… upasaṅkamī’’ti evaṃ sādhu kho panātiādipāṭhassa brāhmaṇassa parivitakkanabhāvena vuttattā brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti padānantarameva assosīti padaṃ sambandhitabbaṃ viya paññāyati, tathāpi ‘‘sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṃ arahataṃ dassanaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ yathāvuttanidassanatthena iti-saddena paricchinditvā vuttattā pana aññattha iti-saddassa adassanato ca atha kho verañjotiādinā kattabbantaradassanamukhena pāḷiyā pakārantare pavattito ca yathāvuttavaseneva ‘‘sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṃ arahataṃ dassanaṃ hotī’’ti vacanānantarameva assosīti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhanaṃ yuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathācariyena hi brāhmaṇassa attanā sutavaseneva ajjhāsayo uppajjatīti upasaṅkamanahetudassanamukhena dassanamattampi sādhu hotīti evaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ katvātiādi vuttanti gahetabbaṃ.
2 “如冷水与热水”这个说法,是顺着惯用顺序来讲的。应当这样理解:因为婆罗门本性尚未寂静,所以他就像热水,而世尊就像冷水;或者也可以这样理解:因为世尊具足智慧之火,所以用热水来比喻,而缺乏这种智慧的婆罗门就像冷水,因此才那样说。“成为一体”是指通过问候的行为而达成一致。“以何种……”等句中,是以什么话向婆罗门问候,那就是可问候的话,应当这样连接。其中,“堪忍吗”是说这个身体多苦,是否还能忍受得了。“能维持吗”是说能否维持那种称为长久持续的活命。因为没有病,所以少疾;因为没有痛苦的生命状态,所以少恙。为了能轻松无难地起身去做各种该做的事,所以叫“轻快起身”。“体力”是问身体是否有能胜任一切事务的体力。“安稳住”就是安乐住。把“应忆念的”这个词拉长,说成“sāraṇīya”,所以说“因为可以忆念,所以是sāraṇīya”。“以诸理由”就是以诸原因。巴利
2.Sītodakaṃviya uṇhodakenāti idaṃ ukkamena mukhāruḷhavasena vuttaṃ, anupasantasabhāvatāya brāhmaṇasseva uṇhodakaṃ viya sītodakenāti attho gahetabbo, ñāṇatejayuttatāya vā bhagavā uṇhodakopamoti katvā tabbirahitaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ sītodakaṃ viya katvā tathā vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Ekībhāvanti sammodanakiriyāya ekarūpataṃ. Yāyātiādīsu yāya kathāya sammodi brāhmaṇo, taṃ sammodanīyaṃ kathanti yojanā. Tattha khamanīyanti dukkhabahulaṃ idaṃ sarīraṃ, kacci khamituṃ sakkuṇeyyaṃ. Yāpanīyanti cirappabandhasaṅkhātāya yāpanāya yāpetuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṃ. Rogābhāvena appābādhaṃ. Dukkhajīvitābhāvena appātaṅkaṃ. Taṃtaṃkiccakaraṇatthāya lahuṃ akicchena uṭṭhātuṃ yoggatāya lahuṭṭhānaṃ. Balanti sarīrassa sabbakiccakkhamaṃ balaṃ kacci atthīti pucchati. Phāsuvihāroti sukhavihāro. Saraṇīyameva dīghaṃ katvā ‘‘sāraṇīya’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘saritabbabhāvato ca sāraṇīya’’nti. Pariyāyehīti kāraṇehi.
“有”是指行为。用在这一点上的中性词,就叫作“有中性词指示”,意思是行为的修饰词。“在一端”的意思是在一边、在合适的地方。“齿落等状态”是指牙齿断落、头发花白等状态。“王统”是指诸王的更替,也就是依次相续。因为出身于久远的高贵家族而称为老,并不是因为年纪大,所以说“在长久延续的家族传承中”。因为拥有广大的财富而称为“mahallaka”,所以说“具足广大财富者”。在“阐明本性”这个意义中,是指在称为阐明本性的意义里。“或不礼敬”是指不认为应当礼敬,这样就说明是不认知的本性。“色是常或无常”这里,也是指以色为常的本性或以色为无常的本性。“或无常”中的“或”字表示决定的意思。巴利
Bhāvoti kiriyā, tasmiṃ vattamāno napuṃsaka-saddo bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso nāma, kiriyāvisesanasaddoti attho. Ekamante ekasmiṃ ante yuttappadeseti attho. Khaṇḍiccādibhāvanti khaṇḍitadantapalitakesādibhāvaṃ. Rājaparivaṭṭeti rājūnaṃ parivattanaṃ, paṭipāṭiyoti attho. Purātanuccakulappasutatāya jiṇṇatā, na vayasāti āha ‘‘cirakālappavattakulanvaye’’ti. Vibhavānaṃ mahantattaṃ lāti gaṇhātīti mahallakoti āha ‘‘vibhavamahattatāya samannāgate’’ti. Vibhāvane nāma attheti pakativibhāvanasaṅkhāte atthe. Na abhivādeti vāti abhivādetabbanti na sallakkheti, evaṃ asallakkhaṇapakatikoti vuttaṃ hoti. Rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vāti etthāpi niccapakatikaṃ aniccapakatikaṃ vāti attho. Aniccaṃ vāti ettha vā-saddo avadhāraṇattho.
“刚出生”是指出生片刻之间,也就是刚出生后立即的意思。“以七步行走后……观看”这里,应当理解为:就像“关门后出去”这类说法一样,观看虽然是在行走之前做的,却被说成是在行走之后做的。“观看”是指当世界开显的神变发生时,用肉眼去看。“最胜”就是更为殊胜。“尊敬”就是供养。“无畏的”就是最上的。巴利
Sampatijātoti muhuttajāto, jātasamanantaramevāti attho. Sattapadavītihārena gantvā…pe… olokesīti ettha dvāraṃ pidhāya nikkhantotiādīsu viya gamanato pure katampi olokanaṃ pacchā kataṃ viya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Olokesinti ca lokavivaraṇapāṭihāriye jāte maṃsacakkhunā volokesīti attho. Seṭṭhoti pasatthataro. Patimānesīti pūjesi. Āsabhinti uttamaṃ.
3 “我不对那婆罗门说……”等这些话,就是“那话”。“以证知而确立”是指在阿罗汉果上站稳。“以出生”是指以刹帝利等种姓来说。“以往生”是指往生到诸天之中。“牵引”就是拉拽。婆罗门以为世尊缺少了被称为行礼等行为的和蔼可亲,所以说“无味”;世尊为了显示,正是缺少与之相反的色贪等和蔼可亲,才是“无味”,于是在说明“和蔼”一词在色味等上的用法时,说了“所缘……”等话。巴利
3.Taṃ vacananti nāhaṃ taṃ brāhmaṇātiādivacanaṃ. Aññāya saṇṭhaheyyāti arahatte patiṭṭhaheyya. Jātivasenāti khattiyādijātivasena. Upapattivasenāti devesu upapattivasena. Āviñchantīti ākaḍḍhanti. Yassa abhivādādikaraṇasaṅkhātassa sāmaggirasassa bhagavati abhāvaṃ maññamāno brāhmaṇo ‘‘arasarūpo’’ti āha, tabbidhurassa rūpataṇhādikasseva sāmaggirasassa abhāvena bhagavā ‘‘arasarūpo’’ti dassetuṃ sāmaggirasasaddassa rūparasādīsu vattanappakāraṃ dassento āha vatthārammaṇādītiādi.
“如多罗树桩一样被处理”:就像被断根的多罗树,其树桩对它们来说,成了色、味等所依的心相续被如此处理——在这个意思上,省略中间词并拉长音,然后加以说明,所以说“如多罗树桩”等。应当理解为修饰语后置:那些已被做成像多罗树桩一样的所依者,就叫“如多罗树桩一样被处理”,意思是“已被做成多罗树桩那样”。只有被截去顶端的多罗树,因为不能再长叶、结果等,所以不成其为所依,这就是“多罗树桩”;像那样,那些色、味等已被做成所依者,就是“如多罗树桩一样被处理”。这是按别词之义来把握含义,依照前面所说的方式就容易理解。为了显示其特殊含义,所以说“像被截去顶端的多罗树一样已被做成”。这样一来,即使像顶端一样的色、味等贪爱已被断除,作为其基础、类似多罗树桩的心相续,直到般涅槃之处,仍然会生起。然而,如果按字面、以修饰语复合词的方式取义,就会产生色、味等与多罗树桩相似的过失。在《萨罗他迪波尼》中,为了避开这个过失,说色、味等有善、不善性,但这与“那些已被如来断除”等经文,以及与“称为欲乐味著的色、味等”等注释并不相符;因为即使漏尽者,直到般涅槃,善、不善的果报仍会生起,所以说他们与“被截去顶端的多罗树”相似也不合理,应当这样理解。或者,不考虑被截去顶端的多罗树是否还站立着,只以“不再生起之法性”的相似来作比喻,那么即使以修饰语复合词的方式取义为“如多罗树桩一样已被做成”,也没有任何过失。“随”字用在“之后”的意思上,所以说“没有后有”等。“随无而去”是指随顺不再生起之法性而趣向于无。“层层递进地令人惊奇”的意思是接连不断地、一层又一层地令人惊奇。“而你所说的”是指:你所说的以礼拜等和合味之不存在为理由,那个理由其实并不存在,这就是其含义。巴利
Tālāvatthukatāti ucchinnamūlānaṃ tālānaṃ vatthu viya nesaṃ rūparasādīnaṃ vatthu cittasantānaṃ katanti imasmiṃ atthe majjhepadalopaṃ dīghañca katvā niddesoti āha tālavatthu viyātiādi. Tālavatthu viya yesaṃ vatthu kataṃ te tālāvatthukatāti visesanassa paranipāto daṭṭhabbo, katatālavatthukāti attho. Matthakacchinnatāloyeva pattaphalādīnaṃ akāraṇatāya avatthūti tālāvatthu, taṃ viya yesaṃ vatthu kataṃ te rūparasādayo tālāvatthukatā, ayaṃ aññapadatthavasena atthaggāho heṭṭhā vuttanayena sugamoti visesamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘matthakacchinnatālo viya katā’’ti. Evañca matthakasadisesu rūparasādīsu rāgesu chinnesupi tabbatthubhūtassa tālāvatthusadisassa cittasantānassa yāva parinibbānaṭṭhānaṃ upapannameva hoti. Yathārutato pana visesanasamāsavasena atthe gayhamāne rūparasādīnaṃ tālāvatthusadisatāya ṭhānaṃ āpajjati. Yaṃ pana sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. 1.3) etaṃ dosaṃ pariharituṃ rūparasādīnaṃ kusalākusalattaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ te tathāgatassa pahīnātiādipāḷiyā, kāmasukhassādasaṅkhātā rūparasātiādiaṭṭhakathāya ca na sameti, khīṇāsavānampi yāva parinibbānā kusalākusalānaṃ phaluppattito tesaṃ matthakacchinnatālasadisatāpi na yuttāti gahetabbaṃ. Atha vā matthakacchinnatālassa ṭhitaṃ aṭṭhitañca amanasikatvā puna anuppattidhammatāsadisamattaṃ upametvā tālāvatthu viya katāti visesanasamāsavasena atthaggahaṇepi na koci doso. Anu-saddo pacchāti atthe vattatīti āha pacchābhāvo na hotītiādi. Anu abhāvaṃ gatāti pacchā anuppattidhammatāvasena abhāvaṃ gatā. Anacchariyāti anu anu uparūpari vimhayakatāti attho. Yañca kho tvaṃ vadesīti yaṃ vandanādisāmaggīrasābhāvasaṅkhātaṃ kāraṇaṃ arasarūpatāya vadesi, taṃ kāraṇaṃ na vijjatīti attho.
4 “依所指而说之义”:婆罗门说“无受用者乔达摩尊”等话,是依着什么意义而说的;世尊在自己身上认可“无受用性”等,又是依着什么意义而认可的——这两者所依的意义,就是“依所指而说之义”。巴利
4.Sandhāya bhāsitamatthanti yaṃ atthaṃ sandhāya brāhmaṇo nibbhogo bhavaṃ gotamotiādimāha, bhagavā ca yaṃ sandhāya nibbhogatādiṃ attani anujānāti, taṃ sandhāya bhāsitamatthaṃ.
5 家族惯行所作,就是家族传统所作。从身体、从身门产生的恶行,就是身恶行。种种,就是多种类别。巴利
5.Kulasamudācārakammanti kulācārakammaṃ. Kāyato kāyadvārato pavattaṃ duccaritaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ. Anekavihitāti anekappakārā.
6 “五欲分贪”是指:在色等五种欲的范畴中,因极度执著而被系缚的欲贪。借此说明:阿那含对物品、装饰等由于结伴贪恋而生起的欲贪,其欲贪性已不存在,因为这类贪已被归入色贪等之中。“其余者”在这里是说:有身见和疑由第一道断除,其余的则由四道全部断除,所以说“随宜”。巴利
6.Pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassāti rūpādīsu pañcasu kāmakoṭṭhāsesu ativiya saṅgavasena niyuttassa kāmarāgassa, etena anāgāmīnaṃ vatthābharaṇādīsu saṅganikantivasena uppajjanakāmarāgassa kāmarāgatābhāvaṃ dasseti tassa rūparāgādīsu saṅgahato. Avasesānanti ettha sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchānaṃ paṭhamena maggena, sesānaṃ catūhipi ucchedaṃ vadati, tenāha ‘‘yathānurūpa’’nti.
7 他厌恶、他思量:就像在厌恶,或者我识别为“他厌恶”。以不善巧所生之义:就是以无明所生之义。巴利
7.Jigucchati maññeti jigucchati viya, ‘‘jigucchatī’’ti vā sallakkhemi. Akosallasambhūtaṭṭhenāti aññāṇasambhūtaṭṭhena.
8-10 其中,是指在前面所说的两种义解之中。结生在这里也是胎的异名,所以说为了获得天界的结生。不再有之有,是指诸法在每一刹那中生起的再生。巴利
8-10.Tatrāti yathāvuttesu dvīsu atthavikappesu. Paṭisandhipariyāyopi idha gabbhasaddoti āha ‘‘devalokapaṭisandhipaṭilābhāyā’’ti. Apunabbhavabhūtāti khaṇe khaṇe uppajjamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhinibbatti.
11 法界:指一切知智。因为它如实持受、了别诸法,所以称为法界。达到说法妙好:指能随自己的喜好而转动、善于说法的能力,达到了这一点。悲心遍满:指以大悲遍满一切众生。为了用譬喻说明这种功德的相状,所以说如地平等心。正因为如此,由于无瞋的本性,所以是不动法性。随生:指随着生而被系缚。随老所驱:指被老所缠缚。成为轮回的桩子:因为无法从轮回中拔出,以不动的状态立在轮回中,就像桩子一样。对于已生的有情,因为恒常面临死亡而有怖畏,所以说今日死等。无与伦比的先已生状态:指无与伦比的、在圣洁的生中最初已生的状态,意思是在一切中最为殊胜。巴利
11.Dhammadhātunti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Tañhi dhamme yāthāvato dhāreti upadhāretīti ‘‘dhammadhātū’’ti vuccati. Desanāvilāsappattoti abhirucivasena parivattetvā desetuṃ samatthatā desanāvilāso, taṃ patto. Karuṇāvipphāranti sabbasattesu mahākaruṇāya pharaṇaṃ. Tādiguṇalakkhaṇameva upamāya vibhāvento āha ‘‘pathavīsamacittata’’nti. Tatoyeva akujjhanasabhāvato akuppadhammatā. Jātiyā anugatanti jātiyā anubaddhaṃ. Jarāya anusaṭanti jarāya paliveṭhitaṃ. Vaṭṭakhāṇubhūtanti vaṭṭato uddharituṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya vaṭṭe niccalabhāvena ṭhitaṃ khāṇu viya bhūtaṃ. Jātānaṃ maccānaṃ niccaṃ maraṇato bhayanti āha ajja maritvātiādi. Appaṭisamaṃ purejātabhāvanti asadisaṃ ariyāya jātiyā paṭhamajātabhāvaṃ, sabbajeṭṭhabhāvanti attho.
不说“阿毗”而说“毗”,这就表明“毗”这个词是一个独立的不变词。所谓“正确地躺卧”,是指不用脚等部位造成伤害,而是好好地躺在上面;虽然“躺卧”这个动词词根本来是不及物的,但因为前面加了“adhi”这个前缀,就应该把它看作及物动词。“指甲尖”就是指甲的顶端。鸟的翅膀相当于手和脚的位置,所以说“手脚蜷缩”。“在这里”指在有光亮的地方。“正在出来的”,意思是在正在出来的那些当中,这是表示从多数中选取的属。“卵壳”就是卵的壳。巴利
‘‘Apī’’ti avatvā ‘‘pī’’ti vadanto pi-saddo visuṃ atthi nipātoti dasseti. Sammā adhisayitānīti pādādīhi upaghātaṃ akarontiyā sammadeva upari sayitāni, akammakassāpi sayatidhātuno adhipubbatāya sakammakatā daṭṭhabbā. Nakhasikhāti nakhaggāni. Sakuṇānaṃ pakkhā hatthapādaṭṭhāniyāti āha ‘‘saṅkuṭitahatthapādā’’ti. Etthāti ālokaṭṭhāne. Nikkhamantānanti nikkhamantesu, niddhāraṇe hetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Aṇḍakosanti aṇḍakapālaṃ.
世间就是众生的住处。世尊在这里觉悟了,所以那棵树就叫菩提树;他自己觉悟,或者人们依靠它而觉悟,因此道和一切知智也叫菩提。被称为“被觉悟”的,就是涅槃,所以涅槃也叫菩提。“以及中间菩提”是第二个例子,即使没有出现“树”这个词,也是为了说明“菩提”这个词可以用来指树。“胜广慧”的意思是,智慧像大地一样广阔。“三明”指的是:在阿罗汉道中与自身同时生起的、称为正见的漏尽智,以及另外两种广大的明,因为它们能破除与之相随的烦恼,所以称为“三明”。“六通”在这里也是同样的道理。“声闻波罗蜜智”是指上首声闻弟子应当获得的一切世间与出世间智。“辟支菩提智”在这里也是同样的道理。巴利
Lokoyeva lokasannivāso. Abujjhi etthāti rukkho bodhi, sayaṃ bujjhati, bujjhanti vā tenāti maggopi sabbaññutaññāṇampi bodhi. Bujjhīyatīti nibbānaṃ bodhi. Antarā ca bodhinti dutiyamudāharaṇaṃ vināpi rukkha-saddena bodhi-saddassa rukkhappavattidassanatthaṃ. Varabhūrimedhasoti mahāpathavī viya patthaṭapaññoti attho. Tisso vijjāti arahattamaggo attanā saha vattamānaṃ sammādiṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ āsavakkhayañāṇañceva itarā dve mahaggatavijjā ca tabbinibandhakakilesaviddhaṃsanavasena uppādanato ‘‘tisso vijjā’’ti vuccati. Cha abhiññāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sāvakapāramīñāṇanti aggasāvakehi paṭilabhitabbaṃ sabbameva lokiyalokuttarañāṇaṃ. Paccekabodhiñāṇanti etthāpi eseva nayo.
用譬喻来对应说明,就是让譬喻的意义和所比喻的事物相一致地说明。以义,就是以所比喻之义。锐利、迅疾、清净、勇健的状态,是用这一点来表示观智已经达到行舍智。转变之时,是用这一点来表示已经到达出起趣向。那时,它就像怀持着道智的胎儿一样,所以说入胎之时。次第证得,是指依初道等次第而证得。具足四支,就是像所说的即使只剩下皮肤、筋、骨,身体的血肉干枯,如此具足四支的精进。巴利
Opammasampaṭipādananti opammatthassa upameyyena samaṃ paṭipādanaṃ. Atthenāti upameyyatthena. Tikkhakharavippasannasūrabhāvoti iminā saṅkhārupekkhāpattataṃ vipassanāya dasseti. Pariṇāmakāloti iminā vuṭṭhānagāminibhāvāpattiṃ. Tadā ca sā maggañāṇagabbhaṃ dhārentī viya hotīti āha ‘‘gabbhaggahaṇakālo’’ti. Anupubbādhigatenāti paṭhamamaggādipaṭipāṭiyā adhigatena. Caturaṅgasamannāgatanti ‘‘kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu (ma. ni. 2.184; saṃ. ni. 2.22; a. ni. 2.5; mahāni. 196), sarīre upasussatu maṃsalohita’’nti evaṃ vuttacaturaṅgasamannāgataṃ vīriyaṃ.
在“欲贪”等说法里,以渴望的方式生起、力量微弱的贪,因为带有想要的意思,就叫“欲”。比它更强的,因为带有染著的意思,就叫“贪”。比那还更强的,就叫“欲贪”。以取相、随相和思惟的方式生起的,叫“思惟”。比那更强、纯粹以强思惟的方式生起的贪,就叫“思惟贪”。比那还更强的,就叫“思惟欲贪”。这种分类,是就同一个贪在生起方式和阶段上的差别来说的。巴利
Chando kāmotiādīsu patthanākārena pavatto dubbalo lobho icchanaṭṭhena chando. Tato balavā rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo. Tatopi balavataro chandarāgo. Nimittānubyañjanasaṅkappavasena pavatto saṅkappo. Tatopi balavasaṅkappavaseneva pavatto rāgo. Tatopi balavataro saṅkapparāgo. Svāyaṃ pabhedo ekasseva lobhassa pavattiākārabhedena avatthābhedena ca vutto.
初禅论的解释巴利
Paṭhamajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
“如彼”的意思是“那是什么”。“此”只是在前面的词里起限定作用,或者指“此所生之义”。“彼之出离”是指从那些欲中出离。“此”是强调词。“欲界”名为欲有,“出离”指初禅。“此”表决定。以彼分断、镇伏断、正断、安息断而出离的远离,称为彼分远离等。身远离、心远离、依远离为身远离等,在此禅论中唯有这三种,因为正断远离等不可能存在。“在解说中”指在大解说中。“就在那里”指在大解说中。“在分别中”指在禅分别中。“因为如此摄集时”指当两种欲都被摄集时。巴利
Seyyathidanti taṃ kathanti attho. Etanti pubbapadeyeva avadhāraṇakaraṇaṃ, etaṃ atthajātaṃ vā. Tannissaraṇatoti tesaṃ kāmānaṃ nissaraṇattā. Esāti eva-kāro. Kāmadhātu nāma kāmabhavo, nekkhammanti paṭhamajjhānaṃ. Esāti niyamo. Tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavivekā tadaṅgavivekādayo. Kāyacittaupadhivivekā kāyavivekādayo, tayo eva idha jhānakathāya, samucchedavivekādīnaṃ asambhavā. Niddeseti mahāniddese. Tatthevāti mahāniddese eva. Vibhaṅgeti jhānavibhaṅge. Evañhi satīti ubhayesampi kāmānaṃ saṅgahe sati.
“以先前的”是指身远离。“在这里”是指在身远离和心远离这两者之中。“以第二个”是指心远离。“这些”是指按照前面所说的方式,作为所缘欲和烦恼欲这两种远离的表达者,也就是“已离诸欲,已离不善法”这些词;这里是属格,表示简别。“愚痴状态的因之遍断”是承接而来的。因为不善法确实是愚痴状态的因。“温床的净化与培育”是指温床的净化和增长。“在分别中只说了诸盖”是连接。在那里说明了原因:“因为上面显示了禅支的对立与敌对状态”。在那里,上面以“有寻”等所说的禅支,显示了它们各自对立面的敌对状态,这就是它的意思。也有读作“因为上面显示了禅支的对立与敌对状态”。在那里,他们说“因为上面以直接对立的方式显示了所说禅支的敌对状态,所以在分别中只说了那些诸盖”这样的意思。“在Peṭaka中”是指大迦旃延长老所作的随顺导论论法之作,而它因为是诸藏的注释,所以称为“Peṭaka”,意思是在那里面。巴利
Purimenāti kāyavivekena. Etthāti etasmiṃ kāyacittavivekadvaye. Dutiyenāti cittavivekena. Etesanti yathāvuttanayena vatthukāmakilesakāmavivekadvayassa vācakabhūtānaṃ vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehīti imesaṃ padānaṃ, niddhāraṇe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Bālabhāvassa hetupariccāgoti anuvattati. Akusaladhammo hi bālabhāvassa hetu. Āsayaposananti āsayassa visodhanaṃ vaḍḍhanañca. Vibhaṅge nīvaraṇāneva vuttānīti sambandho. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘uparijhānaṅgapaccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvadassanato’’ti. Tattha upari savitakkantiādinā vuccamānāni jhānaṅgāni, tesaṃ attano paccanīkānaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvadassanatoti attho. Uparijhānaṅgānaṃ paccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvassa dassanatotipi pāṭho. Tattha ‘‘upari vuccamānajhānaṅgānaṃ ujuvipaccanīkavasena paṭipakkhabhāvadassanato’’ti ‘‘nīvaraṇānaṃ tāneva vibhaṅge vuttānī’’tipi atthaṃ vadanti . Peṭaketi mahākaccāyanattherena kataṃ nettippakaraṇanayānusāripakaraṇaṃ, taṃ pana piṭakānaṃ vaṇṇanābhūtattā ‘‘peṭaka’’nti vuttaṃ, tasminti attho.
所谓“寻”,就是对所缘的思量,所以说为“思量”。对于以“色是色”等方式冲击境的人,应当理解:境生起时的冲击是向上的冲击。“把心引向所缘”,就是让心面向所缘。“随转”,就是来回游转,而那也只是以那种方式生起下一个刹那,因为在胜义上并没有一个东西在移动,其他地方类似的情况也是这样。“随触”,就是遍触。“在那里”,就是在所缘上。以让俱生法随顺各自作用的方式使它们随顺。“在有些地方”,就是在没有第二禅的有伺心中,一切地方都是如此。即使寻与伺一同生起,寻也是以在所缘上安立的方式活动,因此说它是“最初的安立”。“有震荡的”,是因为其本性未寂静而有冲力,所以它正是在第二禅中被断除的支分。“在初禅和第二禅中”,是就五法禅而言的。为了说明不存在脱离禅支的禅那,说了“如树”等话。巴利
Vitakkanaṃ nāma ārammaṇaparikappananti āha ‘‘ūhana’’nti. Rūpaṃ rūpantiādinā visaye ākoṭentassa visayappavattiāhananaṃ upari āhanananti veditabbaṃ. Ārammaṇe cittassa ānayanaṃ nāma ārammaṇābhimukhakaraṇaṃ. Anusañcaraṇanti anuparibbhamanaṃ, tañca khaṇantarassa tathākārena uppādanameva, na hi paramatthato ekassa sañcaraṇamatthi, evamaññatthāpi īdisesu. Anumajjananti parimajjanaṃ. Tatthāti ārammaṇe. Sahajātānuyojanaṃ sakiccānuvattitākaraṇena. Katthacīti dutiyajjhānavirahitesu savicāracittesu sabbatthāti attho. Vicārena saha uppajjamānopi vitakko ārammaṇe abhiniropanākārena pavattiṃ sandhāya ‘‘paṭhamābhinipāto’’ti vutto. Vipphāravāti avūpasantasabhāvatāya vegavā, tenevesa dutiyajjhāne pahānaṅgaṃ jātaṃ. Paṭhamadutiyajjhānesūti pañcakanayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Aṅgavinimuttassa jhānassa abhāvaṃ dassento rukkho viyātiādimāha.
“远离”这个词,如果按“具有远离”这一含义来解释,就说成“因此远离”;如果按另一种含义来解释,就说成“在那远离中”。“令喜悦”就是令满足,或者令增长。“遍满味”是指以殊胜的色身遍满全身的作用。“乐相”就是可爱的自性,意思是甘美。对相应的诸法不加逼迫、也不漠视,而是随顺地一一执取,或者作饶益,这就是“随护”。“林”就是林本身,“水”就是水本身。在种种时候成为明显——通过这句话说明:即使在获得可爱所缘等的时候,乐虽然存在却不明显,只有喜在当时明显;而在领受已得之味的时候,喜虽然存在,乐却更加明显。在这里应当知道,领受已得之味是就心乐而言,不是就身乐而言,因为身乐不与喜相应,所以在这里不是所指的意思。而“此喜”等语,是显示异词同义复合词,或者是从“有”的方面显示后缀派生词。按第二种解释,就是随顺异词同义复合词,把“远离生喜乐”看作一个词,并显示格位词尾没有消失。巴利
Viveka-saddassa bhāvasādhanapakkhe ‘‘tasmā vivekā’’ti vuttaṃ, itarapakkhe ‘‘tasmiṃ viveke’’ti. Pinayatīti tappeti, vaḍḍheti vā. Pharaṇarasāti paṇītarūpehi kāye byāpanarasā. Sātalakkhaṇanti iṭṭhasabhāvaṃ, madhuranti attho. Sampayuttānaṃ pīḷanajjhupekkhanaṃ akatvā anu anu gaṇhanaṃ upakāritā vā anuggaho. Vanameva vanantaṃ. Udakameva udakantaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samaye pākaṭabhāvatoti iminā iṭṭhārammaṇādipaṭilābhasamayepi sukhaṃ vijjamānampi apākaṭaṃ, pītiyeva tattha pākaṭā, paṭiladdharasānubhavanasamaye ca vijjamānapītitopi sukhameva pākaṭataranti dasseti. Ettha ca cetasikasukhavaseneva paṭiladdharasānubhavanaṃ veditabbaṃ, na kāyikasukhavasena tassa pītisampayogasseva abhāvena idhānadhippetattā. Ayañca pītītiādi aññapadatthasamaāsadassanaṃ, assatthipakkhe taddhitapaccayadassanaṃ vā. Dutiyavikappena aññapadatthasamāsavaseneva ‘‘vivekajaṃ pītisukha’’nti idaṃ ekaṃ padanti dasseti, vibhattiyā ca alopaṃ.
“计数次第”是就说法的顺序而说的。“首先入定”是就初学者而说的,但对于已熟练自在的瑜伽行者来说,即使不按顺序,禅那也照样能生起。“烧”就是燃烧。以无常等相为所缘的观,怎么能审察以涅槃为所缘的道呢?因此说了“观”等那段话。其中,“由道成就”是指通过断除常等颠倒的道,与道一起,对那种相的审察从无痴的角度自行成就。或者,“由道”是指由道的作用,也就是断除颠倒的意思。巴利
Gaṇanānupubbatāti desanākkamaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ samāpajjatīti idaṃ ādikammikavasena vuttaṃ, ciṇṇavasīnaṃ pana yogīnaṃ uppaṭipāṭiyāpi jhānaṃ uppajjateva. Jhāpetīti dahati. Aniccādilakkhaṇavisayāya vipassanāya upanijjhāyanaṃ kathaṃ nibbānālambanassa maggassa hotīti āha vipassanāyātiādi. Tattha maggena sijjhatīti niccādivipallāsappahāyakena saha maggeneva taṃ lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ asammohato attano sijjhati. Atha vā maggenāti maggakiccena, vipallāsappahānenāti attho.
“其他”指的是有情。“因为没说到”,是因为在禅那的巴利圣典(《分别论》508等)里没有说到“自心一境性”。“因为说到了”,是因为在那部禅那巴利圣典的《分别》里已经说到了。巴利
Aññoti satto. Avuttattāti ‘‘sacittekaggata’’nti jhānapāḷiyaṃ (vibha. 508 ādayo) avuttattā. Vuttattāti tassā jhānapāḷiyā vibhaṅge vuttattā.
第二禅的解说巴利
Dutiyajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
关于“内在”这一说法,是因为它是禅那的限定语,所以说“这里指的是自身内在”。因为禅那并不是以六根为内在,只有六根才具有那种内在性。小波浪就是涟漪,大波浪就是巨浪。“寂静、平息”等等是彼此同义的表达,意思是依靠禅那的力量而超越。“被导入”就是被带去、被引向毁灭。“异门”是指在禅那的辅助因素上假立禅那的名称,因此不是从究竟意义来说的。巴利
Ajjhattanti jhānavisesanattā vuttaṃ ‘‘idha niyakajjhattamadhippeta’’nti. Jhānañhi ajjhattajjhattaṃ na hoti chaḷindriyānameva tabbhāvato. Khuddakā ūmiyo vīciyo. Mahatiyo taraṅgā. Santā honti samitātiādīni aññamaññavevacanāni, jhānabalena samatikkantāti adhippāyo. Appitāti gamitā vināsaṃ pāpitā. Pariyāyoti jhānaparikkhāre jhānavohārattā aparamatthato.
第三禅的解说巴利
Tatiyajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
为了证得那个,就是为了证得第三道。“从生起而观察”,是指以与慧同行的熟练程度,按照它平等承载的方式,如理地观察。“广大”,是指达到了广大的状态。“有力”,是指因为寻、伺、喜的消失而达到了稳固的状态,所以下文才说“因为不被寻、伺、喜所压倒”等等。说明了舍的种类之后,为了阐明这里所说的舍,才说了“然而,舍”等话。其中,漏尽者在可爱、不可爱的六种所缘出现在面前时,以不放弃清净本性的方式保持中立,所以叫“六支舍”;因为对众生生起中性的行相,所以叫“梵住舍”;作为与心俱生的诸法的中性行相,所以叫“觉支舍”;它本身就是“于各处保持中性的舍”;与第三禅那同时生起时,即使对最上的乐也不偏袒,所以叫“禅那舍”;与第四禅那同时生起时,因为一切敌对法都清净了,所以叫“清净舍”。这样,按照各自状态的差别,说为六种。巴利
Tadadhigamāyāti tatiyamaggādhigamāya. Upapattito ikkhatīti paññāya sahacaraṇaparicayena yathā samavāhibhāvo hoti, evaṃ yuttito passati. Vipulāyāti mahaggatabhāvappattāya. Thāmagatāyāti vitakkavicārapītivigamena thirabhāvappattiyā, teneva vakkhati ‘‘vitakkavicārapītīhi anabhibhūtattā’’tiādi. (Pārā. aṭṭha. 1.11 tatiyajjhānakathā). Upekkhābhedaṃ dassetvā idhādhippetaṃ upekkhaṃ pakāsetuṃ upekkhā panātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatramajjhattatāva khīṇāsavānaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhachaḷārammaṇāpāthe parisuddhapakatibhāvāvijahanākārena ajjhupekkhanato ‘‘chaḷaṅgupekkhā’’ti ca, sattesu majjhattākārappavattattā ‘‘brahmavihārupekkhā’’ti ca, sahajātadhammānaṃ majjhattākārabhūtā ‘‘bojjhaṅgupekkhā’’ti ca, kevalā ‘‘tatramajjhattupekkhā’’ti ca, tatiyajjhānasahagatā aggasukhepi tasmiṃ apakkhapātabhūtā ‘‘jhānupekkhā’’ti ca, catutthajjhānasahagatā sabbapaccanīkaparisuddhitāya ‘‘pārisuddhupekkhā’’ti ca tena tena avatthābhedena chadhā vuttā.
不过,对于与精进同时生起、既不太过精勤也不太松懈的诸行,以旁观中立的行相运作,这就叫“精进舍”。在证得八种色界和无色界禅那之前的前行阶段,就已经朝向断除盖障、寻、伺等;在断除它们时,以不费力、进入中立的行相运作——依定而生起的八种慧,以及在作为取蕴的诸行上以旁观中立的行相运作、依观而生起的四种慧,还有在四道之前、为证得各自的道而运作的四种慧,以及在四种果定之前、为证得各自的果而依无愿解脱运作的四种慧,加上依空解脱和无相解脱运作的两种慧,这十种慧就叫作“行舍”。像上面所说的观慧,在观察诸相时也处于中立,就叫作“观舍”。不苦不乐受就叫作“受舍”。为了说明“这十种舍,按照各处所提到的理路来区分,应当依照《法集论注》所说的方法来理解”,所以说“如是,此十种”等。“按照各处所提到的理路”:这就像地、人等词是显示其区分的基础一样,是依独立的论母词而说的,并不是依地、人等来显示区分,因为其出处已在《殊胜义注》等中说明。因此,《萨罗他迪波尼》中说“为了显示这十种舍依地、人等来区分,应当依照各处所说的理路来理解,所以说‘如是,此十种’等”,不应执取这种说法,应当知道那是未加注意而说的。“按照各处所提到的理路”:比如“在这里,漏尽比丘以眼见色后,既不欢喜也不忧愁,以舍而住,具念正知”等,这是六支舍的出处;“以舍俱行之心遍满一方而住”等,这是梵住舍的出处。通过这种方式,显示这十种舍在各自所说的地方的出处理路,因此这十种舍也应当依照《法集论注》所说的方法来理解,这就是关联。巴利
Vīriyameva pana anaccāraddhaanatisithilesu sahajātesu saṅkhāresu upekkhanākārena pavattaṃ ‘‘vīriyupekkhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhannaṃ rūpārūpajjhānānaṃ paṭilābhato pubbabhāge eva nīvaraṇavitakkavicārādīnaṃ pahānābhimukhībhūtattā tesaṃ pahānepi abyāpārabhāvūpagamanena majjhattākārappavattā samādhivasena uppannā aṭṭha paññā ceva upādānakkhandhabhūtesu saṅkhāresu ajjhupekkhanākārappavattā vipassanāvasena uppannā catunnaṃ maggānaṃ pubbabhāge tassa tassa adhigamāya catasso catunnaṃ phalasamāpattīnaṃ pubbabhāge tassa tassa adhigamāya appaṇihitavimokkhavasena pavattā catasso suññataanimittavimokkhavasena dveti dasa paññā cāti ime aṭṭhārasa paññā saṅkhārupekkhā nāma. Yathāvuttavipassanāpaññāva lakkhaṇavicinanepi majjhattabhūtā vipassanupekkhā nāma. Adukkhamasukhavedanā vedanupekkhā nāma. Imāsaṃ pana dasannampi upekkhānaṃ ‘‘tattha tattha āgatanayato vibhāgo dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbo’’ti dassento āha evamayaṃ dasavidhāpītiādi. Tattha tattha āgatanayatoti idampi hi tāsaṃ vibhāgadassanassa bhūmipuggalādipadaṃ viya visuṃ mātikāpadavasena vuttaṃ, na pana bhūmipuggalādivasena vibhāgadassanassa āgataṭṭhānaparāmasanaṃ āgataṭṭhānassa aṭṭhasāliniyātiādinā vuttattā, tasmā sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. 1.11 tatiyajjhānakathā) yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘imāsaṃ pana dasannampi upekkhānaṃ bhūmipuggalādivasena vibhāgo tattha tattha vuttanayeneva veditabboti dassento āha evamayaṃ dasavidhātiādī’’ti, taṃ amanasikatvā vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Tattha tattha āgatanayatoti ‘‘idha (khīṇāsavo) bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā neva sumano hoti, na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 3.348; a. ni. 6.1) chaḷaṅgupekkhā āgatā, ‘‘upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.308; ma. ni. 1.77; 2.309; 3.230) evaṃ brahmavihārupekkhā āgatāti iminā nayena dasannampi upekkhānaṃ tattha tattha vuttapadesesu āgatanayadassanato ca ayaṃ dasavidhāpi upekkhā dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbāti sambandho.
关于“地”等,则六支舍属于欲界,梵住舍属于色界等等,这是按地来区分;六支舍只属于无学圣者,梵住舍属于凡夫等三类人等等,这是按人来区分;六支舍与悦俱、舍俱的心相应等等,这是按心来区分;六支舍以六种所缘为对象等等,这是按所缘来区分;受舍被受蕴所摄,其余九种舍被行蕴所摄,这是按蕴摄来区分;六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、禅舍、遍净舍、中舍在意义上是一回事,所以在同一刹那中,如果有其中一种,其余的就不会生起,行舍和观舍也应当这样理解;受舍和精进舍则可能在同一刹那中生起,这是按同一刹那来区分;六支舍是无记的,梵住舍是善和无记的,其余的也是这样,而受舍也可能是不善的,这是按善、不善、无记三性来区分;简略地说,有四种法,即按精进、受、中舍与智来分,这是按简略摄来区分——这十种舍,也应当依照《法集论注》所说的方法来理解,这就是本段的释义。巴利
Bhūmītiādīsu pana chaḷaṅgupekkhā kāmāvacarā, brahmavihārupekkhā rūpāvacarātiādinā bhūmito ca, chaḷaṅgupekkhā asekkhānameva, brahmavihārupekkhā puthujjanādīnaṃ tiṇṇampi puggalānantiādinā puggalato ca, chaḷaṅgupekkhā somanassupekkhāsahagatacittasampayuttātiādinā cittato ca, chaḷaṅgupekkhā chaḷārammaṇātiādinā ārammaṇato ca, ‘‘vedanupekkhā vedanākkhandhena saṅgahitā, itarā nava saṅkhārakkhandhenā’’ti khandhasaṅgahavasena ca, ‘‘chaḷaṅgupekkhā brahmavihārabojjhaṅgajhāna pārisuddhitatramajjhattupekkhā ca atthato ekā. Tasmā ekakkhaṇe ca tāsu ekāya sati itarā na uppajjanti, tathā saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanupekkhāpi veditabbā. Vedanāvīriyupekkhānamekakkhaṇe siyā uppattī’’ti ekakkhaṇavasena ca, ‘‘chaḷaṅgupekkhā abyākatā brahmavihārupekkhā kusalābyākatā, tathā sesā. Vedanupekkhā pana siyā akusalāpī’’ti evaṃ kusalattikavasena ca, ‘‘saṅkhepato cattāro ca dhammā vīriyavedanātatramajjhattatāñāṇavasenā’’ti evaṃ saṅkhepavasena ca ayaṃ dasavidhāpi upekkhā dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbāti yojanā.
在这里,虽然《清净道论》里没有按地、人等的类别把它们的自相单独提出来说,但按照那里所说的方式,把地、人等的区分以理则的方式提取出来,还是可以了解的。所以,把那里从自相角度已说和未说的内容合在一起,用“各处所来的理则”等九种方式作了引申说明。因此不说“依《法集论注》所说的方式”,而说“依所说的理则”。就像这样,当说到“漏尽的比丘以眼见色”等时,六支舍因为以色等为所缘,所以从地来说属于欲界,从人来说只属于无学之人,从心来说与悦俱心和舍俱心相应,从所缘来说有六种所缘,从三性来说是无记,智者可以了解。同样,当说到“六支舍、梵住舍、中舍、禅舍、清净舍,从义理上是一”等时,由于它包含在行蕴中,所以可以了解它与梵住舍等在同一刹那不能生起等。如同六支舍一样,其余的也应按照适当的方式,依《清净道论》所说的理则来了知地等区分的提取理则。所谓“无功用为味”,意思是在殊胜的乐中,它有不倾向、反对的作用。巴利
Ettha cetā kiñcāpi aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ bhūmipuggalādivasena sarūpato uddharitvā na vuttā, tathāpi tattha vuttappakāreheva tāsaṃ bhūmipuggalādivibhāgo nayato uddharitvā sakkā ñātunti tattha sarūpato vuttañca avuttañca ekato saṅgahetvā tattha tattha āgatanayatotiādīhi navahi pakārehi atideso kato, teneva ‘‘dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttavasenā’’ti avatvā ‘‘vuttanayenevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathāhi khīṇāsavo bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvāti ādimhi vutte chaḷaṅgupekkhā rūpādiārammaṇatāya bhūmito kāmāvacarā ca puggalato asekkhānameva ca uppajjati, cittato somanassupekkhācittasampayuttā, ārammaṇato chaḷārammaṇā, kusalattikato abyākatā cāti paṇḍitehi sakkā ñātuṃ, tathā chaḷaṅgupekkhā ca brahmavihārupekkhā ca tatramajjhattupekkhā ca jhānupekkhā ca pārisuddhupekkhā ca atthato ekātiādimhi vutte panassa saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahitattā brahmavihārupekkhādīhi saha ekakkhaṇe anuppattiādayo ca sakkā ñātuṃ, yathā ca chaḷaṅgupekkhā, evaṃ sesānampi yathārahaṃ aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ vuttanayato bhūmiādivibhāguddhāranayo ñātabbo. Anābhogarasāti paṇītasukhepi tasmiṃ avanatipaṭipakkhakiccāti attho.
“以人”是指以人为立足点。对与烦恼相应的人加以守护。“度脱”是指完成审查这件事而到达彼岸。“考察”就是审察、简择。“此”指的是念与正知。因为“与那由名身所相应的乐”,所以有“此义”等说法,这是连接关系。“那”指具备禅那的人。“由那所生起”是指:对于某种色法来说,前面所说的、与名身相应的乐是其生起的因,也就是由那所生起的色法。“此”指修行者。“于”指色身。“被触”指被极其殊胜的色法所触。“达乐之极至”是指达到乐的顶点极限。为了显示这个义理而说“以身体感受乐”等,意思是:正在感受作为身体乐之因的、能生起色法的名身之乐时,由于在成就具备禅那之事上依作用而说,所以说“以身体感受乐”。这是为了显示这个义理。说“yaṃ”是表示因的虚词,因此说“以那禅那为因”。对于“已得乐之极至”是指已达到乐的殊胜边际。应当如此了知这些的舍断,这是连接关系。那么,为什么只说在诸禅那中有灭尽呢?这是连接关系。巴利
Puggalenāti puggalādhiṭṭhānena. Kilesehi sampayuttānaṃ ārakkhā. Tīraṇaṃ kiccassa pāragamanaṃ. Pavicayo vīmaṃsā. Idanti satisampajaññaṃ. Yasmā tassa nāmakāyena sampayuttaṃ sukhanti imassa tasmā etamatthantiādinā sambandho. Tassāti jhānasamaṅgino. Taṃsamuṭṭhānenāti taṃ yathāvuttanāmakāyasampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ kāraṇaṃ yassa rūpassa tena taṃsamuṭṭhānena rūpena. Assāti yogino. Yassāti rūpakāyassa. Phuṭattāti atipaṇītena rūpena phuṭattā. Etamatthaṃ dassentoti kāyikasukhahetubhūtarūpasamuṭṭhāpakanāmakāyasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvediyamāno eva jhānasamaṅgitākaraṇe kāriyopacārato ‘‘sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti vuccatīti imamatthaṃ dassentoti attho. Yanti hetuatthe nipātoti āha ‘‘yaṃjhānahetū’’ti. Sukhapāramippatteti sukhassa ukkaṃsapariyantaṃ patte. Evametesaṃ pahānaṃ veditabbanti sambandho. Atha kasmā jhānesveva nirodho vuttoti sambandho.
第四禅那论的解释巴利
Catutthajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
“Kattha cuppannaṃ”这里,“kattha”是表示原因的处格,意思是“当什么原因存在时”。“Nānāvajjane”是指:这种近行定的转向,不同于安止速行中的转向,也不同于之前诸速行中的转向,所以叫“转向有异”。因不舒适的坐姿而生起的疲劳,就是“不舒适坐姿的恼害”。“Upacāre vā”等语是显示另一种观点,意思是“即使在转向同一的近行定中”。“Pītipharaṇena”这句话表明,即使在单一速行中,也不像安止速行那样有遍满欲界喜的情形。应当这样联系理解:忧根可能生起。“Etaṃ”应当联系理解为:忧根生起。“Vitakkavicārappaccayepi”中的“pi”字用得不合位置,应当把它接到前面所说的“pahīnassa”之后,也就是“已断除的忧根也可能生起”。在“Vitakkavicārabhāve”这里,应当把“忧根生起”引进来连接,意思是:这里的处格表示原因,即寻与伺存在的缘故。“Vitakkavicārā”这里的“iti”一词,应当理解为“tasmā”的意思,也就是:因为这种忧根在寻与伺为缘的情况下……乃至不生起;而它生起的地方,只是在寻与伺存在时才会生起。又因为未被断除的寻与伺存在于第二禅的近行定中,所以它在那里可能生起。应当这样理解这里的文句连接。巴利
Kattha cuppannanti ettha katthāti hetumhi bhummaṃ, kasmiṃ hetumhi satīti attho. Nānāvajjaneti appanāvīthiāvajjanato nānā bhinnaṃ purimavīthīsu āvajjanaṃ yassa upacārassa, tasmiṃ nānāvajjane. Visamanisajjāya uppannakilamatho visamāsanupatāpo. Upacāre vātiādi pakkhantaradassanaṃ ekāvajjanūpacārepi vāti attho. Pītipharaṇenāti iminā appanāvīthiyā viya ekavīthiyampi kāmāvacarapītiyā pharaṇamattassa abhāvaṃ dasseti. Domanassindriyassa assa siyā uppattīti sambandho. Etanti domanassindriyaṃ uppajjatīti sambandho. Vitakkavicārappaccayepīti pi-saddo aṭṭhānappayutto. So ‘‘pahīnassā’’ti heṭṭhā vuttapadānantaraṃ yojetabbo ‘‘pahīnassāpi domanassindriyassā’’ti. Vitakkavicārabhāveti ettha ‘‘uppajjati domanassindriya’’nti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummaṃ, vitakkavicārabhāvahetūti attho. Vitakkavicārāti ettha iti-saddo tasmāti etasmiṃ atthe daṭṭhabbo, tena yasmā etaṃ domanassindriyaṃ vitakkavicārapaccaye…pe… neva uppajjati, yattha pana uppajjati, tattha vitakkavicārabhāveyeva uppajjati. Yasmā ca appahīnāyeva dutiyajjhānūpacāre vitakkavicārā, tasmā tatthassa siyā uppattīti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.
这里“tattha”指的是第二禅的近行定。“assā”指的是忧根。“可能生起”这句话,只是通过显示条件来表明一种可能性而已。因为忧根生起的可能性,只有在近行定那个刹那来假设才合理;而在没有寻和伺的第二禅安止刹那,连这种生起的可能性也不应该假设。否则,在善心刹那不可能生起不善的忧,就不该说“它在那里可能生起”。或者,这里的处格是“在附近”的意思,指在近行定禅那之后的速行中。“在第二禅中”这里也是指,在无间速行中也不生起,如此乃至在上面的乐根中也是如此。与喜根的生起相关联。“已断”之说,是因为已说“五下分结的遍尽”而说的。以无苦故,即以无苦性故。如此“以无乐故”在这里也是如此。以此,即以遮破苦乐之语。以可意不可意的颠倒感受为特相,即以极可意、极不可意的颠倒之中舍所缘的感受为特相;因为中舍所缘也包含在可意不可意之中,不离彼而存在。巴利
Tatthāti dutiyajjhānūpacāre. Assāti domanassindriyassa. Siyā uppattīti idañca paccayamattadassanena sambhāvanamattato vuttaṃ. Domanassuppattisambhāvanāpi hi upacārakkhaṇeyeva kātuṃ yuttā, vitakkavicārarahite pana dutiyajjhānakkhaṇe taduppattisambhāvanāpi na yuttā kātunti. Itarathā kusalacittakkhaṇe akusaladomanassuppattiyā asambhavato ‘‘tatthassa siyā uppattī’’ti na vattabbaṃ siyā. Samīpatthe vā etaṃ bhummaṃ, upacārajjhānānantaravīthīsūti attho. Dutiyajjhāneti etthāpi anantaravīthīsupi na tveva uppajjatīti attho, evaṃ upari sukhindriyepi. Somanassindriyassa uppattīti sambandho. Pahīnāti vuttāti idaṃ ‘‘pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā’’ti vuttattā vuttaṃ. Dukkhābhāvenāti dukkhatābhāvena. Evaṃ sukhābhāvenāti etthāpi. Etenāti dukkhasukhapaṭikkhepavacanena. Iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītānubhavanalakkhaṇāti atiiṭṭhaatianiṭṭhānaṃ viparītassa majjhattārammaṇassa anubhavanalakkhaṇā, majjhattārammaṇampi hi iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu eva paviṭṭhaṃ tabbinimuttassa abhāvā.
关于宿住随念的解说巴利
Pubbenivāsakathāvaṇṇanā
12 无色界禅那也因为支的等同性而被归入第四禅,所以论中说“某些是神通的基础”等等。正因如此,下文才说“成就八等至”等等。在这些禅那当中,只有第四禅是神通的基础和灭尽定的基础,其他禅那则不是。不过,这是就远因来说的,因此把它们一起称为“四禅”,应当这样理解。“心一境性之处”这句话是就现法乐住而说的,所以说“漏尽者”等等。“成就一切事业”是指成就天住等一切佛陀的事业。“给予一切世间出世间功德”这句话总括了前面所说的作为观的基础等一切内容。应当知道,此禅那因为是能给予一切佛功德的道智的所依之处,所以才这样说。“Yathayidaṃ”就是“如同这个”。“Abhinīhārakkhamaṃ”是指能够朝向并导向神变等目的的,也就是适合引生神变等。巴利
12. Arūpajjhānānampi aṅgasamatāya catutthajjhāne saṅgahoti āha kesañci abhiññāpādakānītiādi, teneva vakkhati ‘‘aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā’’tiādi (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.12). Tesu ca catutthajjhānameva abhiññāpādakaṃ nirodhapādakaṃ hoti, na itarāni. Dūrakāraṇataṃ pana sandhāya ‘‘cattāri jhānānī’’ti nesampi ekato gahaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Cittekaggatatthānīti idaṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāraṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha khīṇāsavānantiādi. Sabbakiccasādhakanti dibbavihārādisabbabuddhakiccasādhakaṃ. Sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇadāyakanti iminā yathāvuttaṃ vipassanāpādakattādisabbaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Idañhi jhānaṃ bhagavato sabbabuddhaguṇadāyakassa maggañāṇassa padaṭṭhānattā evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathayidanti yathā idaṃ. Abhinīhārakkhamanti iddhividhādiatthaṃ tadabhimukhaṃ nīharaṇayoggaṃ.
对于“以证得禅那为缘”这一说法,指的是以证得禅那为因、依靠证得禅那而生起的那些法。所谓“恶的”,就是低劣的意思。所谓“欲行境”,是指被欲求所支配、沉溺于欲求之中,还没有达到盖的状态、也没有与盖同俱,以赞叹自己等方式生起的心念,比如“啊,真希望导师只问我一个人,然后才为比丘们开示这样的法”这类方式所生起的慢等烦恼。不过,有些传本里写作“证得禅那的敌对者”,这个读法应当被认为是抄写上的疏忽,因为前面在解释“清净”一词时已经说过:“由于证得禅那的敌对者——诸盖不存在,所以以远离盖而清净。”而《萨罗他迪波尼》中说:“所谓‘欲行境’,是指被欲求所支配、沉溺于欲求所生的种种忿怒与不悦,这个读法也是不恰当的,应当这样理解。正因如此,《清净道论》里完全没有显示这个读法。”在这里应当知道,因为这种读法把“种种忿怒与不悦”执取为已经达到盖的状态的过失,所以它被否定了。巴利
Jhānappaṭilābhapaccayānanti jhānappaṭilābhahetukānaṃ jhānappaṭilābhaṃ nissāya uppajjanakānaṃ. Pāpakānanti lāmakānaṃ. Icchāvacarānanti icchāya vasena otiṇṇānaṃ nīvaraṇabhāvaṃ tadekaṭṭhatañca appattānaṃ attukkaṃsanādivasappavattānaṃ aho vata mameva satthā paṭipucchitvā bhikkhūnaṃ evarūpaṃ dhammaṃ deseyyātiādinayappavattānaṃ mānādīnaṃ. Potthakesu pana ‘‘jhānappaṭilābhapaccanīkāna’’ntipi pāṭhaṃ likhanti, so pamādapāṭhoti gahetabbo ‘‘jhānappaṭilābhapaccanīkānaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ abhāvassa nīvaraṇadūrībhāvena parisuddho’’ti evaṃ pubbe parisuddhapadeyeva vuttattā. Sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. 1.12) pana ‘‘icchāvacarānanti icchāya avacarānaṃ icchāvasena otiṇṇānaṃ pavattānaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kopaappaccayānanti atthoti ayampi pāṭho ayutto evāti gahetabbaṃ. Tato eva ca visuddhimagge ayaṃ pāṭho sabbena sabbaṃ na dassito’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ca nānappakārānaṃ kopaappaccayānanti evaṃ nīvaraṇabhāvappattadosānaṃ parāmaṭṭhattā ayaṃ pāṭho paṭikkhittoti veditabbo.
在“贪欲等”这一表述里,“贪欲”这个词不仅指本性上不属于盖的贪,也涵盖了慢等烦恼,因为“得禅那的缘”这个说法是一直贯穿下来的。至于“两者”这个词,指的是无秽和离随烦恼这两者,应当依次依照《无秽经》和《事经》的教导来理解。在这两部经里,虽然也提到了达到盖那种程度的粗重过失,但由于是依已证得第四禅的人来说的,所以这里取的只是微细的烦恼。这里只是依据秽和随烦恼的共同特征来引用这些经。正因如此,才说“依照经的教导”,而不是“依经本身”。巴利
Abhijjhādīnanti ettha abhijjhā-saddena ca anīvaraṇasabhāvasseva lobhassa mānādīnañca gahaṇaṃ jhānappaṭilābhapaccayānanti anuvattamānattā. Ubhayampīti anaṅgaṇattaṃ vigatūpakkilesattañcāti etaṃ ubhayampi yathākkamaṃ anaṅgaṇasuttavatthasuttānusāreneva veditabbaṃ. Tesu ca suttesu kiñcāpi nīvaraṇasabhāvappattā thūladosāpi vuttā, tathāpi adhigatacatautthajjhānassa vasena vuttattā idha sukhumā eva te gahitā. Aṅgaṇupakkilesasāmaññena panettha suttānaṃ apadisanaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘suttānusārenā’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana suttavasenāti.
为了说明“宿住随念智”这个词的构词含义,也就是“宿住随念智”,而说了“在宿住随念中”等话。现在,为了从分类上说明宿住、宿住随念以及其中的智,而说了“其中”等话。“宿”这个词指的是过去生,“住”这个词是业作格,所以说“在过去诸生中曾住过的诸蕴”。这里所说的“曾住性”,是指在自相续中曾经生起,因此说了“曾领受的”等话。现在,为了说明“住”这个词依自他相续而成立的含义,说了“曾住的诸法或曾住者”之后,为了展开解释,又说了“以所行境为住”等话。因为即使是作为所行境的诸法,也因智而被称为“曾住者”,而为了说明它们依自他识的所行境而有两种,所以说了“自己的”等话。或者,“被他人识所了知的”也是“曾住者”,这是句子的连接。这里也应引入“被限定的”一词来连接。因为在无始的轮回中,那些自己从未了知过的有情的诸蕴,只是被某些他人所了知,所以被称为“被他人识所了知的”;对它们的随念比前者更难,因为那些被他人了知而成为“被他人识所了知”者,是依那些他人的现在相续之流而可了知的。而且,那些“被他人识所了知者”有两种:已般涅槃的和未般涅槃的。其中,对已般涅槃者的随念极难,因为其相续已完全断尽。为了显示那种达到顶峰的、被他人所了知的宿住,而说了“在对已断轮辐者等的随念中”。其中,“已断轮辐者”是指过去已般涅槃的漏尽者,因为他们已断除了轮回之道。以“等”字,也包含了依狮子跃入的方式对未般涅槃的、被他人识所了知者的随念。应以“以那种念而随念宿住,那念就是宿住随念”来连接。巴利
Pubbenivāsānussatiyaṃ ñāṇaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇanti nibbacanaṃ dassento āha pubbenivāsānussatimhītiādi. Idāni pubbenivāsaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiṃ tattha ñāṇañca vibhāgato dassetuṃ tatthātiādi vuttaṃ. Pubba-saddo atītabhavavisayo, nivāsa-saddo ca kammasādhanoti āha ‘‘pubbe atītajātīsu nivutthakkhandhā’’ti. Nivutthatā cettha sakasantāne pavattatā, tenāha anubhūtātiādi. Idāni saparasantānasādhanavasena nivāsa-saddassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nivutthadhammā vā nivutthā’’ti vatvā taṃ vivarituṃ gocaranivāsenātiādi vuttaṃ. Gocarabhūtāpi hi dhammā ñāṇena nivutthā nāma honti, te pana saparaviññāṇagocaratāya duvidhāti dassetuṃ attanotiādi vuttaṃ. Paraviññāṇaviññātāpi vā nivutthāti sambandho. Idhāpi paricchinnāti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Anamataggepi hi saṃsāre attanā aviññātapubbānaṃ sattānaṃ khandhā pareheva kehici viññātattā paraviññāṇaviññātā nāma vuttā, tesaṃ anussaraṇaṃ purimato dukkaraṃ yehi parehi viññātatāya te paraviññāṇaviññātā nāma jātā, tesaṃ vattamānasantānānusārena viññātabbato. Te ca paraviññāṇaviññātā duvidhā parinibbutā aparinibbutāti. Tesu ca parinibbutānussaraṇaṃ dukkaraṃ sabbaso susamucchinnasantānattā. Taṃ pana sikhāppattaparaviññātaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇādīsū’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha chinnavaṭumakā atīte parinibbutā khīṇāsavā chinnasaṃsāramaggattā . Ādi-saddena aparinibbutānaṃ paraviññāṇaviññātānampi sīhokkantikavasaena anussaraṇaṃ gahitaṃ. Yāya satiyā pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati, sā pubbenivāsānussatīti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
“vihita”这个词是“vidha”的同义词,所以注释者说“anekavidha”(种种)。意思是:按生、趣、胎等方式来说,有多种多样。
或者,把“vihita”理解为“被运用、被称说”的意思,本来应该说“以多种方式被运用”,但中间省略了词,就直接表述为“以多种……被称说”。这里的“方式”,是指名、姓等类别。“被称说”是指佛陀等人所说的。
“anu”这个词表示“无间”的意思,所以注释者说“就在刚转向时”。由此也说明遍作已经开始。
“因为已圆满波罗蜜者”等语句,则说明即使没有遍作也能成就。巴利
Vihita-saddo vidha-saddapariyāyoti āha ‘‘anekavidha’’nti, bhavayoniādivasena bahuvidhanti attho. Vihitanti vā payuttaṃ vaṇṇitanti atthaṃ gahetvā ‘‘anekehi pakārehi vihita’’nti vattabbe majjhepadalopaṃ katvā niddiṭṭhanti āha ‘‘anekehi…pe… saṃvaṇṇita’’nti. Pakārehīti nāmagottādipakārehi. Saṃvaṇṇitanti buddhādīhi kathitaṃ. Anu-saddo anantaratthadīpakoti āha ‘‘abhininnāmitamatte evā’’ti, etena ca parikammassa āraddhataṃ dasseti. Pūritapāramīnañhītiādinā parikammaṃ vināpi siddhiṃ dasseti.
“为了显示已开始的方式”,意思是显示那些已开始随念的、过去曾住过的诸蕴。“生起”就是“生”,也就是“有”。那以单一业为根本、以执取和舍弃为界限的蕴相续,在这里被理解为“生”,所以说“一个”等。“劫”指不可数劫,而从意义上说,它是依那样转起的法而施设的时间,依这些法便可知道它的减损和增长。“坏”有坏灭、毁灭的意思,所以叫“坏劫”,即不可数劫。与坏灭的毁灭共存,以之为性,所以叫“坏住劫”。“成”等也是如此。其中,“成”是成立、生起或增长。以火而毁灭,叫“火坏”。不过,从广度上说,坏的界限并没有差别,所以说“总是”。为了说明就像一座城市那样,在生起的刹那因有变异而被称为“生处”,所以说“在结生等时震动”。意思是,其威神力转起时,其中所包含的一切有情的疾病等灾祸都会止息。或者说,“无论他期望多远”,这是指世尊在宣称能于一刹那中以声音令一切处了知、并显示自己的色身时,针对所缘境域而说的“无论他期望多远”。巴利
Āraddhappakāradassanattheti anussarituṃ āraddhānaṃ pubbe nivutthakkhandhānaṃ dassanatthe. Jāyatīti jāti, bhavo. So ekakammamūlako ādānanikkhepaparicchinno khandhappabandho idha ‘‘jātī’’ti adhippetoti āha ekampītiādi. Kappoti asaṅkhyeyyakappo, so pana atthato kālo tathāpavattadhammamupādāya paññatto, tesaṃ vasenassa parihāni ca vaḍḍhi ca veditabbā. Saṃvaṭṭo saṃvaṭṭanaṃ vināso assa atthīti saṃvaṭṭo, asaṅkhyeyyakappo. Saṃvaṭṭena vināsena saha tiṭṭhati sīlenāti saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Evaṃ vivaṭṭotiādīsupi. Tattha vivaṭṭanaṃ vivaṭṭo, uppatti, vaḍḍhi vā. Tejena vināso tejosaṃvaṭṭo. Vitthārato panāti puthulato pana saṃvaṭṭasīmābhedo natthi, tenāha ‘‘sadāpī’’ti. Ekanagariyā viya assa jātakkhaṇe vikārāpajjanato jātikkhettavohāroti dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭisandhiādīsu kampatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ānubhāvo pavattatīti tadantogadhānaṃ sabbesaṃ sattānaṃ rogādiupaddavo vūpasammatīti adhippāyo. Yaṃ yāvatā vā pana ākaṅkheyyāti vuttanti yaṃ visayakkhettaṃ sandhāya ekasmiṃ eva khaṇe sabbattha sarena abhiviññāpanaṃ, attano rūpakāyadassanañca paṭijānantena bhagavatā ‘‘yāvatā vā pana ākaṅkheyyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“在这些当中”是依格,表示简别。“食自然掉落之果者”,是指吃自己掉下来的果子,这是就苦行时期说的。“在此处的投生”,是指在最后一生中的投生。“同一族姓”,是指与兜率天的族姓相同。“其他”,是指容貌等。“外道”,是指主张业果的人。“发愿”,是指以发愿为标志、积累福德与智慧的时期。“依死亡与结生”,是指看见自己或他人于各种生命形态中的死亡之后,中间不触及任何东西,只以把握结生的方式来了知,因此说“因为他们”等。“以两种方式”,是指依蕴的次第,也依死亡与结生的方式。“以狮子跃入的方式”,也是指以狮子扑击的方式。烦恼因被烧灼、折磨,所以精进称为“热勤”,因此说“以精进热勤”。巴利
Etesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Pavattaphalabhojanoti sayaṃpatitaphalāhāro, idañca tāpasakālaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Idhūpapattiyāti idha carimabhave upapattiyā. Ekagottoti tusitagottena ekagotto. Itareti vaṇṇādayo. Titthiyāti kammaphalavādino. Abhinīhāroti abhinīhāropalakkhito puññañāṇasambharaṇakālo vutto. Cutipaṭisandhivasenāti attano parassa vā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ attabhāve cutiṃ disvā antarā kiñci anāmasitvā paṭisandhiyā eva gahaṇavasena evaṃ jānanaṃ icchitappadesokkamananti āha tesañhītiādi. Ubhayathāpīti khandhapaṭipāṭiyāpi cutipaṭisandhivasenapi. Sīhokkantavasenapīti sīhanipātavasenapi. Kilesānaṃ ātāpanaparitāpanaṭṭhena vīriyaṃ ātāpoti āha ‘‘vīriyātāpenā’’ti.
天眼智论的注释巴利
Dibbacakkhuñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
13 13. 因为住在天界,所以叫“天”;诸天的净信之眼叫作“天眼”,因此说“像天界一样”。“远”字加上“也”这个词,表示连微细的所缘也能取到。由于依靠精进的发动而成就,所以一切修习,或者说具备勤勇行的神足修习,特别从神足修习的角度说就是精进修习;因此说“由精进修习之力所生”。依天住来说,就是依遍等至的四禅。用这一点说明它天性的远因。依止天住,用这一点说明近因——从作为近因的基础禅那生起。另一种意思是:依止天住,就是依止作为依止缘的、属于天住的、与自己相应的色界第四禅,天眼智因此得以生起。针对光耀之界与光明相结合,所以说了“以光明摄持”等话。其中,“以光明摄持”就是依遍光明来摄持。“以见之义”就是以见色的体性,由此显示“眼能见色、令色明了”的词源,说明这就是眼。“以执行眼的作用”这是比喻:像眼一样所以叫眼,显示其相似之相;意思是它执行了见清净与不清净等称为眼的作用。巴利
13. Divi bhavattā dibbanti devānaṃ pasādacakkhu vuccatīti āha ‘‘dibbasadisattā’’ti. Dūrepīti pi-saddena sukhumassāpi ārammaṇassa gahaṇaṃ. Vīriyārambhavasena ijjhanato sabbāpi bhāvanā, padhānasaṅkhārasamannāgato vā iddhipādabhāvanāvisesato vīriyabhāvanāti āha ‘‘vīriyabhāvanābalanibbatta’’nti. Dibbavihāravasenāti kasiṇādijjhānacataukkavasena. Iminā dūrakāraṇatthe assa dibbabhāvamāha. Dibbavihārasannissitattāti iminā āsannakāraṇabhūtapādakajjhānato nibbattanti dibbavihārasannissitattāti imassa dibbavihārapaayāpannaṃ attanā sampayuttaṃ rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānaṃ nissayapaccayabhūtaṃ nissāya dibbacakkhuñāṇassa pavattattātipi attho. Divudhātussa jutigatiyogaṃ sandhāya ālokapaaggahenātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ālokapariggahenāti kasiṇālokapariggahavasena. Dassanaṭṭhenāti rūpadassanabhāvena, iminā ‘‘cakkhati rūpaṃ vibhāvetī’’ti nibbacanato cakkhuttaṃ dasseti. Cakkhukiccakaraṇenāti idaṃ cakkhumiva cakkhūti upamāya sadisanimittadassanaṃ, samavisamādidassanasaṅkhātassa cakkhukiccassa karaṇatoti attho.
“如所说”是指出《小污垢经》中的一段经文(《中部》3.242)。其中,在“疑”等项里:世尊在菩提树下还没有完全觉悟时,用天眼看见种种色,生起了“这到底是什么?这到底是什么?”的疑。然后,为了消除这个疑,他不再作意那些色;在不再作意时,生起了惛沉睡眠。为了消除它,他又重新作意一切色;那时对罗刹等生起了惊悚。为了排除惊悚,他作意“这里有什么好怕的?”;由于他作意的善巧,生起了称为“踊跃”的、会破坏三摩地的世俗喜。为了遮止它,他让作意时的精进力松弛下来,于是生起了称为“身懈怠”的粗恶。为了遮止它,他又提起精进,结果成了过度勤精进。为了遮止它,他又让精进松弛,结果成了过度懈怠。遮止这些之后,他看见天界的色,生起了称为“希求”的渴爱。为了遮止它,他作意低劣等各种色,生起了称为“种种所缘散乱”的种种想。之后,他舍弃这些,只作意一个境,于是对色生起了过度思察,也就是过度思惟。“光明”,指由遍作所生起的光明。“而且我看不见色”,应当理解为:“因为耽著于遍作光明和作意,所以用天眼看不见色。”要这样结合生起的次第来理解其含义。“人之此”,指属于人的、人的眼所能看到的粗色。因为它接近人的可见范围,所以称为“人近行处”,因此说“超越人近行处”。“以色之见”,是指以见远、微细等色的见。巴利
Yathāhāti upakkilesasuttappadesaṃ (ma. ni. 3.242) nidasseti. Tattha vicikicchātiādīsu bhagavato bodhimūle anabhisambuddhasseva dibbacakkhunā nānāvidhāni rūpāni passantassa ‘‘idaṃ nu kho kiṃ, idaṃ nu kho ki’’nti vicikicchā uppannā, tato pana vicikicchānivattanatthaṃ tāni rūpāni amanasikaroto amanasikarontassa thinamiddhaṃ uppannaṃ, tato nivattanatthaṃ puna sabbarūpāni manasikaroto rakkhasādīsu chambhitattaṃ uppannaṃ, ‘‘kimettha bhāyitabba’’nti bhayavinodanavasena manasikaroto attano manasikārakosallaṃ paṭicca uppilasaṅkhātā samādhidūsikā gehasitapīti uppannā, tannisedhāya manasikāravīriyaṃ sithilaṃ karontassa kāyālasiyasaṅkhātaṃ duṭṭhullaṃ, tannisedhāya puna vīriyaṃ paggaṇhato accāraddhavīriyaṃ, puna tannisedhāya vīriyaṃ sithilayato atilīnavīriyaṃ uppannaṃ, tannisedhetvā dibbarūpāni passato abhijappāsaṅkhātā taṇhā uppannā, tannisedhāya hīnādinānārūpāni manasikaroto nānārammaṇavikkhepasaṅkhātā nānattasaññā uppannā. Puna taṃ vihāya ekameva manasikaroto atinijjhāyitattaṃ rūpānaṃ ativiya cintanaṃ uppannaṃ. Obhāsanti parikammasamuṭṭhitaṃ obhāsaṃ . Na ca rūpāni passāmīti ‘‘parikammobhāsamanasikārapasutatāya dibbacakkhunā rūpāni na passāmī’’ti evaṃ uppattikkamasahito attho veditabbo, manussānaṃ idanti mānusakaṃ mānusakacakkhugocaraṃ thūlarūpaṃ vuccati. Tadeva manussānaṃ dassanūpacārattā manussūpacāroti āha ‘‘manussūpacāraṃ atikkamitvā’’ti. Rūpadassanenāti dūrasukhumādirūpadassanena.
天眼智并不是没有转向和准备工作就能生起的,它必定以先前已经生起、并且已经住立的色为所缘;而且当它生起时,由于力量微弱,正在坏灭的色不能成为它的所缘;死亡心正好在业生色坏灭的那个刹那生起,结生心则在投生那个刹那生起,所以说“死时刹那”等。这里说的“见色”其实就是“见有情”,因此用“正在死亡者”等说法,是依着补特伽罗来安立的。“美、丑”这一说法,是就“色”这个词也有表示形状的意思而说的,就像在“化作大如象王之形色”等处那样。“已至善趣者”就是善逝,所以说“于善趣道”。“以此句”指的是“随业而往”这一句。巴利
Yasmā niyamena purejātaṭṭhitarūpārammaṇaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ āvajjanaparikammehi vinā na uppajjati, na ca uppajjamānaṃ bhijjamānaṃ rūpamassa ārammaṇaṃ hoti dubbalattā, cuticittañca kammajarūpassa bhaṅgakkhaṇe eva uppajjati, paṭisandhicittañca upapattikkhaṇe, tasmā āha cutikkhaṇetiādi. Rūpadassanamevettha sattadassananti cavamānetiādinā puggalādhiṭṭhānena vuttaṃ. Abhirūpe virūpetipīti idaṃ vaṇṇa-saddassa saṇṭhānavācakataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ mahantaṃ hatthirājavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvātiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.138) viya. Sundaraṃ gatiṃ gatā sugatāti āha ‘‘sugatigate’’ti. Iminā pana padenāti yathākammupageti iminā padena.
看见地狱众生被火网、刀剑打击等弄得身体和形色破碎之后,依靠紧接着生起的欲界速行心而了知他们感受痛苦,这也是天眼所见的结果,所以说“这只是天眼的作用”。所谓“如此作意”,是说为了要知道他们的业,先进入作为基础的禅那,出定之后,以遍作的方式作意:“这是什么业呢?”等等。然后,以那业为所缘,在转向、遍作等之后生起的、与色界第四禅相应的智生起,这叫做“随业趣向智”,应当这样连接理解。看天众时也是同样的道理。“单独的遍作”是指:像宿住智等那样,除了天眼智的遍作之外,并没有另外单独的遍作。不过,这里有些人说:“不需要以基础禅那的入定等作为遍作,仅仅在‘这是什么业呢?’等作意之后,以业为主,取与业相应的法为所缘,安止路心就生起了。未来分智也是这样,所以说没有单独的遍作……乃至……与天眼一起成就。”这种说法不能接受,因为即使是已得自在的神通,如果没有基础禅那等遍作,也不会生起。而且,仅仅以基础禅那等,并不算作单独的遍作,所以应当接受:这些智是仅靠天眼而成就的。未来分智也是这样:为了要知道以天眼所见众生在未来的情况,在基础禅那等之后,依照智的力量,在未来许多劫中可能生起的、属于过去自身所摄的五蕴、与彼相关联的法以及以彼为所缘的一切世间和出世间法及假名,在一刹那间取为所缘而生起的、与第四禅相应的智,也没有所谓的单独遍作。应当这样连接理解。巴利
Nerayikānaṃ aggijālasatthanipātādīhi vibhinnasarīravaṇṇaṃ disvā tadanantarehi kāmāvacarajavaneheva ñātaṃ tesaṃ dukkhānubhavanampi dassanaphalāyattatāya ‘‘dibbacakkhukiccamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ manasikarotīti tesaṃ kammassa ñātukāmatāvasena pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya parikammavasena kinnu khotiādinā manasikaroti. Athassa taṃ kammaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā āvajjanaparikammādīnaṃ upari uppannena rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānena sampayuttaṃ yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, idaṃ yathākammupagañāṇaṃ nāmāti yojanā. Devānaṃ dassanepi eseva nayo. Visuṃ parikammanti pubbenivāsādīnaṃ viya dibbacakkhuñāṇaparikammaṃ vinā visuṃ parikammaṃ natthi. Keci panettha ‘‘pādakajjhānasamāpajjanaparikammehi kiccaṃ natthi, kinnu kho kammantiādimanasikārānantarameva kammaṃ. Kammasīsena taṃsampayutte ca dhamme ārammaṇaṃ katvā appanāvīthi uppajjati. Evamanāgataṃsañāṇepi, teneva visuṃ parikammaṃ nāma natthi…pe… dibbacakkhunā saheva ijjhantīti vutta’’nti vadanti. Taṃ na gahetabbaṃ vasībhūtānampi abhiññānaṃ pādakajjhānādiparikammaṃ vinā anuppattito. Pādakajjhānādimattena ca visuṃ parikammaṃ nāma na hotīti dibbacakkhunāva etāni ñāṇāni siddhānīti gahetabbaṃ. Evaṃ anāgataṃsañāṇassāpīti dibbacakkhunā diṭṭhassa sattassa anāgate pavattiṃ ñātukāmatāya pādakajjhānādīnamanantaraṃ ñāṇabalānurūpaṃ anāgatesu anekakappesu uppajjanārahe pubbe attabhāvapariyāpanne pañcakkhandhe tappaṭibaddhe tadārammaṇe ca sabbe lokiyalokuttaradhamme sammutiñca ekakkhaṇe ālambitvā uppajjanakassa catutthajjhānasampayuttassa anāgataṃsañaāṇassāpi visuṃ parikammaṃ nāma natthīti yojanā.
有些论师在这里说:“在宿住随念中,对名字、姓氏等的把握也确实存在,但它不是在神通智那一刹那发生的,而是在紧接着其后的欲界速行刹那中才发生,因为构想名字的时候不可能同时有其他构想,而且业和转生是没有限量的。可是,当所有遍作相的法与义在同一刹那被神通智看见之后,随后就按照自己的喜好,以欲界心产生‘他叫这个名字’之类的构想,就像用眼睛看见许多色法之后,产生‘柱子、瓶子’之类的构想一样。即使在某些地方没有加以构想,那也是可以被构想的,所以一切名字、姓氏等实际上都是被构想出来的。就像在这里一样,在宿住随念中也是如此,针对可以被构想的部分,经典中以‘他叫这个名字’等附带说明的方式宣说。”另一些论师则说:“名字、姓氏等一切都在同一刹那被了知,只是按照自己的喜好用言语表达出来。”这些论师在意义上和前面那些人相同,因为过去已见过的东西,在再次言说的时候也是可以被构想的,所以他们实际上也归结为:所见的是可被构想的法。还有一些论师说:“从‘他从那里死后,在某处投生’等语句来看,由于依次了知过去和未来的法,连同名字、姓氏等一起把握是容易的。”这种说法是不合理的,因为那会导致连诸佛也不能了知一切,从而否定一切知智。经典中“这些人确实如此”等语,是显示随业趣向智生起的方式。这里,身、语等是指身表与语表。巴利
Keci panettha ‘‘pubbenivāsānussatiyaṃ viya nāmagottādigahaṇampi attheva, tañca na abhiññākkhaṇe, atha kho tadanantaresu kāmāvacarajavanakkhaṇesu eva hoti nāmaparikappakāle itaraparikappāsambhavā kammenuppattiyañca pariyantābhāvā. Sabbaparikammanimittesu pana dhammesu atthesupi ekakkhaṇe abhiññāya diṭṭhesu yathārucivasena pacchā evaṃnāmotiādinā kāmāvacaracittena vikappo uppajjati cakkhunā diṭṭhesu bahūsu rūpesu thambhakumbhādivikappo viya. Yañca kattha avikappitaṃ, tampi vikappanārahanti sabbaṃ nāmagottādito vikappitameva hoti. Yathā cettha, evaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiyampi parikappārahatampi sandhāya pāḷiyaṃ evaṃnāmotiādinā apadesasahitameva vutta’’nti vadanti. Aññe pana ‘‘nāmagottādikaṃ sabbampi ekakkhaṇe paññāyati, abhirucitaṃ pana vacasā voharantī’’ti vadanti, tepi atthato purimehi sadisā eva, pubbe diṭṭhassa puna vohārakālepi parikappetabbato parikappārahadhammadassanameva tehipi atthato upagataṃ. Eke pana ‘‘so tato cuto amutra udapādintiādivacanato kameneva atītānāgatadhammajānanena nāmagottādīhi saddhiṃ gahaṇaṃ sukara’’nti vadanti, taṃ ayuttameva buddhānampi sabbaṃ ñātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya sabbaññutāhānippasaṅgato. Pāḷiyaṃ ime vata bhontotiādi yathākammupagañāṇassa pavattiākāradassanaṃ. Kāyavācādi cettha kāyavacīviññattiyo.
“沉重”这个词,是因为它和无间业相似才这么说。因为如果没有请求原谅,那就正是无间业了。“他的”指的是那种具有沉重性质的诽谤。“年长者”只是说年龄大,不是说智慧大。应当知道,这是带着轻蔑的意思说的:“这个人连一点世间常识都不懂,只是让我们丢脸,就是个败坏僧团的人。”所以这是通过毁损功德来诽谤。“贤友”等话,是长老希望他能证得上位的道果,出于悲悯而表明自己的身份。“恢复如常”的意思是,道的障碍不再存在了。“比自己年长”是说他自己也是年长者。这里“蹲坐着”的说法,在《清净道论》里也有提到。不来者和应供者为了将来防护自己,不会宽恕;其余的人则因嗔恚也不宽恕,所以说“如果他不原谅”。巴利
Bhāriyanti ānantariyasadisattā vuttaṃ. Khamāpane hi asati ānantariyameva. Tassāti bhāriyasabhāvassa upavādassa. Mahallakoti kevalaṃ vayasāva mahallako, na ñāṇena, ‘‘nāyaṃ kiñci lokavohāramattampi jānāti, parisadūsako eva amhākaṃ lajjitabbassa karaṇato’’ti adhippāyena hīḷetvā vuttattā guṇaparidhaṃsanena upavadatīti veditabbaṃ. Āvusotiādinā thero uparimagguppattimassa ākaṅkhanto karuṇāya attānamāvikāsi. Pākatikaṃ ahosīti maggāvaraṇaṃ nāhosīti adhippāyo. Attanā vuḍḍhataroti sayampi vuḍḍho. Etthāpi ‘‘ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā’’ti visuddhimagge vuttaṃ. Anāgāmī arahā ca āyatiṃ saṃvaratthāya na khameyyuṃ, sesā dosenapīti āha ‘‘sace so na khamatī’’ti.
那些……劝导的人,他们也应被归入受持邪见业的人。在“具戒者”等说法中,从严格意义上说,指的是已安住于最高道果的人,因为只有他必定能证得胜智;或者,其他最后一生的人安住于戒等,他们也必定能生起胜智。“胜智”指阿拉汉果。“如此具足”指如此产生的。就像那无失误而产生的一样,此也如此产生于地狱中,这就是意思。为了说明被称为“如此具足”的,所以说了“那言语”等。“那言语”指诽谤圣者的言语。“心”指诽谤圣者的心。“见”指在诽谤圣者时不见其过失的邪见。若以“我将舍弃这一切”的心态忏悔过失后,没有以请求原谅的方式舍弃、没有放弃,那么就像被地狱狱卒带来安置在地狱中一样,就这样被安置在地狱中;仅仅因为诽谤圣者,他必定如此生于地狱,就像以道证果一样,是必然产生的——这是此处的意旨。巴利
Ye ca…pe… samādapenti, tepi micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānāti yojetabbaṃ. Sīlasampannotiādīsu nippariyāyato aggamaggaṭṭho adhippeto tasseva aññārādhanā niyamato, sesāpi vā pacchimabhavikā sīlādīsu ṭhitā tesampi aññuppattiniyamato. Aññanti arahattaphalaṃ. Evaṃ sampadanti evaṃ nibbattikaṃ. Yathā taṃ avirajjhanakanibbattikaṃ, evamidampi etassa niraye nibbattananti attho. Yaṃ sandhāya ‘‘evaṃsampadamida’’nti niddiṭṭhaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ taṃ vācantiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ vācanti ariyūpavādaṃ. Cittanti ariyūpavādakacittaṃ. Diṭṭhinti ariyūpavāde dosābhāvadassanadiṭṭhiṃ. ‘‘Sabbametaṃ pajahissāmī’’ti cittena accayaṃ desetvā khamāpanavasena appahāya appaṭinissajjitvā. Yathābhataṃ nikkhitto evaṃ nirayeti yathā nirayapālehi āharitvā niraye ṭhapito, evaṃ niraye ṭhapito eva, ariyūpavādenevassa idaṃ niyamena niraye nibbattanaṃ yathā maggena phalaṃ sampajjati, evaṃ sampajjanakanti adhippāyo.
邪见是一切恶行的根本,所以是最严重的。那些过失以邪见为最严重,因此称为“以邪见为最严重的过失”,意思就是在一切过失当中,邪见是最严重的过失。对还没有离贪的人来说,死后就是投生到另一个存在,所以注释里说“死后,就是指紧接着生起的诸蕴的执取”。“身坏”是指命根断绝,因为身体正是随着维持它的命根断绝而瓦解,所以说“身坏,就是命根断绝”。“从这而来是乐”,这里的“ayo”就是福。“来处”是指到来的原因,或因悦意所缘等而转起故为味著,即味著。似阿修罗,即似饿鬼阿修罗。巴利
Micchādiṭṭhi sabbapāpamūlattā paramā padhānā yesaṃ vajjānaṃ tāni micchādiṭṭhiparamāni vajjāni, sabbavajjehi micchādiṭṭhiyeva paramaṃ vajjanti attho. Avītarāgassa maraṇato paraṃ nāma bhavantarupādānamevāti āha ‘‘paraṃ maraṇāti tadanantaraṃ abhinibbattakkhandhaggahaṇe’’ti. Yena tiṭṭhati, tassa upacchedeneva kāyo bhijjatīti āha ‘‘kāyassa bhedāti jīvitindriyassupacchedā’’ti. Eti etasmā sukhanti ayo, puññaṃ. Āyassāti āgamanassa, hetussa vā. Ayati iṭṭhārammaṇādīhi pavattatīti āyo, assādo. Asurasadisanti petāsurasadisaṃ.
漏尽智论释巴利
Āsavakkhayañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
14 以通达自性相,是指以不迷惑的方式通达被称为自性的相。产生,是指令生起。到达彼处,是指依止涅槃——它作为道之所缘缘而成为处所、成为因。不转起,是指不转起之因。依烦恼,是指依那些漏——由于断除这些漏,此智成为漏尽智;也就是依那些烦恼、依那些漏,因为统摄了一切烦恼,所以这是从异门、从另一种方式来说的。经典中虽然依过去时说“了知”,但依现观时每一种了知的现在性,而以现在时说“如是知、如是见”来说明。因为从欲漏等解脱时,见漏也必然随之解脱,所以应知见漏的解脱也是如此。巴利
14.Sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhenāti sabhāvasaṅkhātassa lakkhaṇassa asammohato paṭivijjhanena. Nibbattikanti nipphādanaṃ. Yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvāti yaṃ nibbānaṃ maggassa ārammaṇapaccayaṭṭhena ṭhānaṃ kāraṇabhūtaṃ āgamma. Appavattinti appavattihetuṃ. Kilesavasenāti yesaṃ āsavānaṃ khepanena idaṃ ñāṇaṃ āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ jātaṃ, tesaṃ kilesānaṃ vasena, tesaṃ āsavānaṃ vasena sabbakilesānaṃ saṅgahaṇato pariyāyato pakārantaratoti attho. Pāḷiyaṃ atītakālavasena ‘‘abbhaññāsi’’nti vatvāpi abhisamayakāle tassa tassa jānanassa paccuppannataṃ upādāya ‘‘evaṃ jānato evaṃ passato’’ti vattamānakālena niddeso kato. Kāmāsavādīnaṃ vimuccaneneva tadavinābhāvato diṭṭhāsavassāpi vimutti veditabbā.
“生已尽”这个了知,是依烦恼灭尽的省察而有的;“梵行已立”等了知,则是依道、果、涅槃的省察而有的。因此说“以生已尽等语,是彼之范围”。这里“范围”指所缘境。为了说明:即使在三时中,对于生的灭尽,直接的加行虽然不可能现起,但为此而作加行仍有意义,而且它的果就是未来诸蕴不再生起,所以说“然而,由于道未修习……”等语。因为以“由于道未修习”等语说明:如果未以道断除烦恼,未来诸蕴的生起就会存在;如果以道灭尽那些烦恼,诸蕴就不会生起。又,烦恼具有三时性,如于“生”中所说的方法,即使以某种缘可能灭除,但在心相续中生起与烦恼相违的圣道刹那,才是它的灭尽;如同将火把置于种子的相续中,令未来的种子不再生起一般,由于与烦恼相违的缘现前,未来便不再生起。因此,以道刹那的生起所成的烦恼灭尽,令作为烦恼之果的诸蕴在未来不再生起,这就是“生已尽”——此义得以阐明。由此说:“由于道已修习,以证得不生起法性而说‘已尽’。”这里的意思是:名为“烦恼灭尽”的道已修习、已生起,以缘的灭尽故不再生起的诸蕴之生,以其未来不再生起所成立的“不生起法性”而说“已尽”。因为有为法不可能以别的缘而灭尽,若可能,就会有以别的缘等而灭尽的过失。与它相违的刹那生起,才是它的灭尽得以产生。这是“了知生已尽”的关联。“为此状态”指这些种类如此,那种状态就是“此状态”,为了那个目的。“显示”指以总结的方式显示。巴利
‘‘Khīṇā jātī’’ti jānanaṃ kilesakkhayapaccavekkhaṇavasena, vusitaṃ brahmacariyantiādijānanaṃ maggaphalanibbānapaccavekkhaṇavasena hotīti āha ‘‘khīṇā jātītiādīhi tassa bhūmi’’nti. Tattha bhūminti visayaṃ, tīsu kālesupi jātikkhayaṃ pati ujukameva vāyāmāsambhavepi taṃ pati vāyāmakaraṇassa sātthakataṃ, tassa anāgatakkhandhānuppattiphalatañca dassetuṃ yā panātiādi vuttaṃ. Yā pana maggassa abhāvitattātiādinā hi maggenāvihatakileseheva āyatiṃ khandhānaṃ jāti hessati, tesañca kilesānaṃ maggena vināse sati khandhā na jāyissanti, kilesānañca tekālikatāya jātiyaṃ vuttanayena kenaci paccayena vināsayogepi cittasantāne kilesaviruddhaariyamaggakkhaṇuppādanameva tabbināso viruddhapaccayopanipātena āyatiṃ anuppajjanato bījasantāne aggikkhandhopanipātena āyatiṃ bījattānuppatti viya, iti maggakkhaṇuppattisaṅkhātakilesābhāvena kilesaphalānaṃ khandhānaṃ āyatiṃ anuppattiyeva jātikkhayoti ayamattho vibhāvīyati, tenāha ‘‘maggassa bhāvitattā anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena khīṇā’’ti. Ettha cāyamattho kilesābhāvasaṅkhātassa maggassa bhāvitattā uppāditattā paccayābhāvena anuppajjantī khandhānaṃ jāti tena āyatiṃ anuppajjanasaṅkhātena anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena vohārato khīṇā me jātīti. Na hi saṅkhatadhammānaṃ paccayantarena vināso sambhavati, sambhave ca tassa paccayantaratādippasaṅgato. Tabbiruddhakkhaṇuppādanameva tabbināsuppādanaṃ. Tanti khīṇajātiṃ abbhaññāsinti sambandho. Itthattāyāti ime pakārā itthaṃ, tabbhāvo itthattaṃ, tadatthāya. Dassentoti nigamanavasena dassentoti.
优婆塞身份的说明注释巴利
Upāsakattapaṭivedanākathāvaṇṇanā
15 “无明”一词因为和“dhi”这个音结合,所以是表示所属关系时用的宾格。“诸足”就是双脚。“以名声”指以随从眷属。“在热闹节庆中”指在热闹和节庆之中。“此”是“超越”这个词。为了说明这不是因为重复诵念才说了两次,而是依据两种含义,所以说了“或者”等话。以不加区分、以含义的共同性而完成的“殊妙”,是中性抽象名词的表达方式;即使就说法清净等差别来看,也仍然如此成立,因为先前已经完成,所以说“殊妙……清净”。“面朝下放置”指被某人面朝下放。“自己面朝下”指自己变成面朝下。“以各种方式”指以种种形式,或者指以说明无味性等的原因。巴利
15.Aññāṇanti dhi-saddayogena sāmiatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Pādānīti pāde. Yasasāti parivārena. Kotūhalacchareti kotūhale acchare ca. Ayanti amikkanta-saddo. Nayidaṃ āmeḍitavasena dvikkhattuṃ, atha kho atthadvayavasenāti dassento atha vātiādimāha. Avisesena atthasāmaññena nipphanno abhikkantanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, desanāpasādādivisesāpekkhāyapi tatheva tiṭṭhati pubbe nipphannattāti āha ‘‘abhikkantaṃ…pe… pasādo’’ti. Adhomukhaṭhapitaṃ kenaci. Heṭṭhāmukhajātaṃ sayameva. Pariyāyehīti pakārehi, arasarūpattādipaṭipādakakāraṇehi vā.
由于“去”这一词根没有双宾语用法,“我皈依乔达摩”这两个词也不是对格。不过,为了说明前一个词是对格,后一个词是主格,所以才说“我皈依乔达摩”。这也表明“iti”这个词是省略标记。“从苦”就是从苦、从恶。因为“诸贤”这个词要求从格,所以只有从格才合适。“已证道、已现证灭”这两个词也只是显示已住于果位的人,而不是住于道位的人;为了说明这一点,所以说“对于依照教导修行的人”。“广说”这个词涵盖了“诸比丘,一切有为法或无为法中,离染被称为它们中最上的”这句话。“不动”指没有渴爱。“无违逆”因为显示无违逆之义,所以是无违逆、清净或殊妙。“熟练”因为应当使言语熟练,或者因为具备殊胜的声义功德而结合。“和合”指结合、会合。“于彼处”指在那些双人之中——这是关联。“八人见法者”指这八个人因为已经见到圣法,所以是“见法者”。巴利
Gamudhātussa dvikammakattābhāvā gotamaṃ saraṇanti idaṃ padadvayampi na upayogavacanaṃ. Api ca kho purimameva, pacchimaṃ pana paccattavacananti dassetuṃ ‘‘gotamaṃ saraṇanti gacchāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena ca iti-saddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti dasseti. Aghassāti aghato pāpato. Tātāti hi padaṃ apekkhitvā nissakkasseva yuttattā. Adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodheti padadvayenāpi phalaṭṭhā eva dassitā, na maggaṭṭhāti dassento ‘‘yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne cā’’ti āha. Vitthāroti iminā ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (itivu. 90; a. ni. 4.34) vuttapadaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Anejanti nittaṇhaṃ. Appaṭikūlanti avirodhatthadīpanato aviruddhasuciṃ paṇītaṃ vā. Vācāya paguṇīkattabbato, pakaṭṭhehi saddatthaguṇehi yogato vā paguṇaṃ. Saṃhatoti ghaṭito sameto . Yatthāti yesu purisayugesūti sambandho. Aṭṭha ca puggaladhammadasā teti te aṭṭha puggalā ariyadhammassa diṭṭhattā dhammadasā.
在“皈依”等说法里,简要的意思是:以令人怖畏、摧破等含义,三宝称为“皈依”;正是这三宝是我的庇护、是我的藏身之处、是我的最终归宿——依佛陀的善觉性等功德,生起以三宝为归宿的心,这种心的生起就叫作“皈依”。具备上面所说的这种心,就称为“皈依”。这皈依分为世间和出世间两种。其中,出世间的皈依只在道的刹那生起,靠断除皈依的随烦恼而成就。世间的皈依有四种生起方式:以“我把自己奉献给佛陀”等说法作自我奉献;以上面说的以三宝为归宿;以弟子身份归投;以及以礼拜。应当知道,在所有这些情况里,皈依都只是因为三宝是最殊胜的应受供养者才成立,不是因为亲属关系、怖畏、师长等原因。因此,如果因为亲属关系等理由去礼拜外道,皈依不破;如果以应受供养者的身份去礼拜别的对象,皈依就破了。世间皈依有决定趣向涅槃的同类果,因为皈依者在未来必定证得涅槃。而获得一切世间成就、超越恶趣苦等,则是它带来的利益果。对三宝的疑惑、邪智等,是它的杂染。它的破坏也有两种:有过失的和没有过失的。其中,第一种是由邪见在先、礼拜外道等行为造成的,因为会带来不可爱的果报,所以是有过失的。没有过失的破坏,则是因死亡而发生。出世间的皈依则完全不存在杂染或破坏,应当这样理解。巴利
Saraṇantiādīsu ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – bhayahiṃsanādiatthena ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ nāma, tadeva me ratanattayaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ parāyaṇanti buddhasubuddhatādiguṇavasena tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo saraṇagamanaṃ nāma. Yathāvuttena iminā cittuppādena samannāgato saraṇaṃ gacchati nāma. Etassa ca saraṇagamanassa lokiyalokuttaravasena duvidho pabhedo. Tattha lokuttaraṃ saraṇagamanūpakkilesasamucchedena maggakkhaṇeyeva sijjhati. Lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ catudhā pavattati ahaṃ attānaṃ buddhassa pariccajāmītiādinā attaniyyātanena, yathāvuttatapparāyaṇatāya, sissabhāvūpagamanena, paṇipātena cāti. Sabbatthāpi cettha seṭṭhadakkhiṇeyyabhāvavaseneva saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, na ñātibhayācariyādivasenāti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ ñātiādivasena titthiyaṃ vandato saraṇaṃ na bhijjati, dakkhiṇeyyabhāvena aññaṃ vandato saraṇaṃ bhijjati. Lokiyassa saraṇagamanassa nibbānappattiniyamaṃ sadisaphalaṃ saraṇagatassa anāgate nibbānappattiniyamato. Sabbalokiyasampattisamadhigamo pana apāyadukkhādisamatikkamo ca ānisaṃsaphalaṃ. Tīsu vatthūsu cassa saṃsayamicchāñāṇādi saṃkileso. Bhedopissa sāvajjānavajjavasena duvidho. Tattha paṭhamo micchādiṭṭhipubbakehi titthiyapaṇipātādīhi hoti, so ca aniṭṭhaphalattā sāvajjo. Anavajjo pana kālakiriyāya hoti. Lokuttarasaraṇagamanassa sabbathā saṃkileso vā bhedo vā natthīti veditabbaṃ.
“谁是近事男”等,是在问近事男身份的本质、成因等问题。其中,凡是在家人,不管是人还是非人,按照前面所说的方式皈依了三宝,这个人就是近事男。又因为通过皈依等行为亲近、侍奉三宝,所以称为“近事男”。不杀生等五条戒是他的戒。舍弃五种邪贩卖等邪命,以如法、公平的方式维持生活,是他的正命。没有信心、破戒等是近事男身份的失败,这些的消除则是圆满,应当这样理解。巴利
Ko upāsakotiādi upāsakattasarūpakāraṇādipucchā. Tattha yo gahaṭṭho manusso vā amanusso vā vuttanayena tisaraṇaṃ gato, ayaṃ upāsako. Yo ca saraṇagamanādikiriyāya ratanattayaṃ upāsanato ‘‘upāsako’’ti vuccati. Pañca veramaṇiyo cassa sīlaṃ. Pañcamicchāvāṇijjādipāpājīvaṃ pahāya dhammena samena jīvitakappanamassa ājīvo. Assaddhiyadussīlatādayo upāsakattassa vipatti, tadabhāvo sampattīti veditabbā.
“以住处”是指寝室等居住场所的那一部分。“今日的状态”是指在今天生起的净信等。以身为表的原因而有的身体部分,就是身肢。以语为表的原因而有的嘴唇、舌头等,就是语肢。“不移动”就是不让它动摇。由此说明:在语言发生之前,作为站立、动作等动摇之因的风界变化形态,并不是单独的身表,因为那时还没有需要单独表达的特殊意图,而且它有助于语表,所以只归入语表本身。就像用身体抓痒等时,作为产生声音之因的地界形态变化,因为不表达特殊意图,所以不是语表;这里也是如此。因为能表达意图,这些才被称为“表”,并不只是因为风界、地界的动摇或产生声音之因的变化形态而已。这样也应知道:外界树木等的动摇、产生声音之因的上述变化形态,并不是表,这个道理已经成立。有些人把“语肢”解释为“好吧,可以”这类语言的组成部分等,这与“不移动”的说法不符。“令同意后”是指令其生起许可。也有“持同意”的读法,意思是以不外出的方式把握。“面朝向”是指面向世尊,因此说“不离开”。巴利
Vihāraggenāti ovarakādivasanaṭṭhānakoṭṭhāsena. Ajjabhāvanti asmiṃ ahani pavattaṃ pasādādiṃ. Kāyaviññattihetuko sarīrāvayavo kāyaṅgaṃ. Vacīviññattihetukaṃ oṭṭhajivhādi vācaṅgaṃ. Acopetvāti acāletvā. Etena ca vacīpavattiyā pubbabhāge ṭhānakaraṇānaṃ calanapaccayo vāyodhātuyā vikārākāro visuṃ kāyaviññatti na hoti, tena visuṃ viññāpetabbassa adhippāyassa abhāvā vacīviññattiyameva saṅgayhati tadupakārattā. Yathā kāyena kāyakaṇḍuyanādīsu sadduppattihetubhūto pathavīdhātuyā ākāravikāro visuṃ adhippāyassa aviññāpanato vacīviññatti na hoti, evamayampīti dasseti. Adhippāyaviññāpanato hetā viññattiyo nāma jātā, na kevalaṃ vāyupathavīnaṃ calanasadduppattipaccayabhūtavikārākāramattatāya. Evañca bahiddhā rukkhādīsu calanasadduppattipaccayānaṃ yathāvuttappakārānaṃ vikārākārānaṃ aviññattitā samatthitā hotīti veditabbā. Keci vācaṅganti ‘‘hotu sādhū’’ti evamādivācāya avayavantiādiṃ vadanti, taṃ acopetvāti iminā na sameti. Khantiṃ cāretvāti anumatiṃ pavattetvā. ‘‘Khantiṃ dhāretvā’’tipi pāṭho, bahi anikkhamanavasena gaṇhitvāti attho. Paṭimukhoti bhagavati paṭinivattamukho, tenāha ‘‘apakkamitvā’’ti.
16 因为“乞求”这个词根可以带两个宾语,所以说“世尊被请求接受雨安居的住处”。为了把“即使在庄稼丰收的时节”这个意思讲清楚,又说了“即使在谷价极贱的时候”。意思是说,即使在谷价极贱的时候,只要给一点点东西,就能换来大量的早稻和晚稻,就是在这样的时节。“乞求者”就是请求的人。“已播种的庄稼”指已经播种的庄稼。“在那里”指在毗兰若,这里用“只长成穗子,所以这里叫‘穗播’”来解释那个限定复合词,是把限定成分后置的构词说明。或者也可以这样解释:“一切庄稼在这里都只长成穗子、生长、成熟,所以叫‘穗播’”,因此说“只长成穗子”。为了说明“靠穗子维持生计,所以叫‘穗播’”这一构词解释,又说了“以穗子”等话。“在打谷场”指在称量谷物的场所。“验色者”指检验金币的人。巴利
16. Yācadhātussa dvikammakattā ‘‘bhagavā vassāvāsaṃ yācito’’ti vuttaṃ. Susassakālepīti vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘atisamagghepī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ativiya appagghepi yadā kiñcideva datvā bahuṃ pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇaṃ gaṇhanti, tādise kālepīti attho. Bhikkhamānāti yācamānā. Vuttasassanti vapitasassaṃ. Tatthāti verañjāyaṃ, etena ‘‘vuttaṃ salākā eva hoti etthāti salākāvuttā’’ti visesanassa paranipātena nibbacanaṃ dasseti. Atha vā ‘‘sabbaṃ sassaṃ salākāmattameva vuttaṃ nibbattaṃ sampannaṃ etthāti salākāvuttā’’tipi nibbacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, tenāha ‘‘salākā eva sampajjatī’’ti. ‘‘Salākāya vuttaṃ jīvikā etissanti salākāvuttā’’tipi nibbacanaṃ dassetuṃ salākāya vātiādi vuttaṃ. Dhaññakaraṇaṭṭhāneti dhaññaminanaṭṭhāne. Vaṇṇajjhakkhanti kahāpaṇaparikkhakaṃ.
在“以捡拾、以钵”这句话里,“以钵”指的是用钵,意思是拿着钵。因为钵是用来乞食的器具,所以叫“拾取器”,也就是钵。因此说“以捡拾、以钵”等等。另一种说法是,“以钵”就是“以拿取”,意思是:为了捡拾而应当拿的钵,这个意思成立,所以说“拿着钵”。巴利
Uñchena paggahenāti ettha paggahenāti pattena, taṃ gahetvāti attho. Paggayhati etena bhikkhāti hi paggaho, patto. Tenāha paggahenayo uñchotiādi. Atha vā paggahenāti gahaṇena, uñchatthāya gahetabbo pattoti sijjhatīti āha ‘‘pattaṃ gahetvā’’ti.
恒河以北的地区叫北道,那里是他们的住处,或者是从那里来的人,就叫北道人,所以经文说“北道居民”等等。也有写成“北道者”的版本,按词源规则解释,意思是一样的。“殿”是指马厩。也有人写成“曼陀罗”,这样写不好。那马厩因为是圆形的,而且做成了多种样式,所以经文里说“马圈”。巴利
Gaṅgāya uttaradisāpadeso uttarāpatho, so nivāso etesaṃ, tato vā āgatāti uttarāpathakā, tenāha uttarāpathavāsikātiādi. ‘‘Uttarāhakā’’tipi pāṭho, so eva attho niruttinayena. Mandiranti assasālaṃ. ‘‘Mandara’’ntipi likhanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Sā ca mandirā yasmā parimaṇḍalākārena bahuvidhā ca katā, tasmā ‘‘assamaṇḍalikāyo’’ti vuttā.
恒河以南的地方叫南道,出生在那里的人就叫南道人。所谓“以佛为我的”,是说他们习惯性地把佛执取为“我的”,也就是把佛当作自己人、归属于自己的那种心态,对其他几句也应这样理解。“如是”是指按照后面所说的方式去理解含义的时候。“份”就是份额。“与那相配的”是指与那相应、够得上那的。“得到”和“没有”连在一起,意思是得到之后却保不住。也有一种写法是“得到”,意思是根本得不到当侍者的机会。“亲戚”加上因为具足最胜功德而成为“最胜”,合起来就是“亲戚中最胜者”。这段话的意思是:在食物难得的时候,不做讲说开示之类的事,而是安住在极严格的少欲知足之行、保持活命清净,以符合世尊心意的方式去寻求食物,这才真是具足亲族之情与敬爱之心的圣弟子所应当做的。巴利
Gaṅgāya dakkhiṇāya disāya deso dakkhiṇāpatho, tattha jātā manussā dakkhiṇāpathamanussā. Buddhaṃ mamāyanti mamevāyanti gaṇhanasīlā buddhamāmakā, evaṃ sesesupi. Evanti pacchā vuttanayena atthe gayhamāne. Paṭivīsanti koṭṭhāsaṃ. Tadupiyanti tadanurūpaṃ tappahonakaṃ. Laddhāti labhitvā no hotīti sambandho. ‘‘Laddho’’ti vā pāṭho, upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ neva labhinti attho. Ñāti ca pasatthatamaguṇayogato seṭṭho cāti ñātiseṭṭho. Evarūpesu ṭhānesu ayameva patirūpoti āmisassa dullabhakālesu parikathobhāsādiṃ akatvā paramasallekhavuttiyā ājīvasuddhiyaṃ ṭhatvā bhagavato adhippāyānuguṇaṃ āmisaṃ vicārentena nāma ñātisinehayuttena ariyasāvakeneva kātuṃ yuttanti adhippāyo.
“魔的旋转”是指被魔搅动的心念转变,也就是内心被迷惑的意思。“那也能”是说,它也能把北俱卢洲或三十三天城旋转过来。巴利
Mārāvaṭṭanāyāti mārena katacittaparivaṭṭanena, cittasammohanenāti attho. Tampīti uttarakuruṃ vā tidasapuraṃ vā āvaṭṭeyya.
我在弗沙佛的教法里,辱骂过他的弟子们。
你们吃大麦吧,也享用吧,但不要吃稻米。巴利
‘‘Phussassāhaṃ pāvacane, sāvake paribhāsayiṃ; Yavaṃ khādatha bhuñjatha, mā ca bhuñjatha sālayo’’ti. (apa. thera 1.39.88) –
《譬喻》里所说的不善,是因为那时它得到了机会。所谓“固定施”,就是用“我要布施”这句话把布施确定下来。所谓“付诸行动”,就是即使只是用身体把要布施的东西拿过去送人,也算。“堪忍”就是能够。“简言之”就是概要地说。所谓“一寻光”,是指在四周、下方和上方各约八十手长的范围内,那已经凝聚成整体的六色光明,从那里六色光芒像水渠从水池中流出一样,向十个方向奔散;因为这光明看起来大约只有一寻,所以称为“一寻光”。又因为这些随好各自在世尊身上与光明的成就相结合,在虚空中像日月等一样清晰照耀,所以说它们和一寻光一起,是任何别的光明都胜不过的。巴利
Apadāne vuttassa akusalassa tadā okāsakatattā. Nibaddhadānassāti ‘‘dassāmā’’ti vācāya niyamitadānassa. Appitavattassāti kāyena atiharitvā dinnavatthunopi. Visahatīti sakkoti. Saṅkhepenāti nīhārena. Byāmappabhāyāti samantato heṭṭhā ca upari ca asītihatthamatte ṭhāne ghanībhūtāya chabbaṇṇāya pabhāya, yato chabbaṇṇaraṃsiyo taḷākato mātikāyo viya nikkhamitvā dasasu disāsu dhāvanti, sā yasmā byāmamattā viya khāyati, tasmā ‘‘byāmappabhā’’ti vuccati. Yasmā anubyañjanāni ca paccekaṃ bhagavato sarīre pabhāsampattiyuttā ākāse candasūriyādayo viya vibhātā virocanti, tasmā tāni byāmappabhāya saha kenaci anabhibhavanīyāni vuttāni.
“无义关联”这里说的是希望对方受害,“关联”用的是位格,但表达的是属格的意思,所以注释里说“对那样的话的伤害”。在这里,因为说法的原因而产生了义理;或者通过它,从说法等产生义理,所以叫“义处”——也就是当下发生的事由。巴利
Anatthasañhiteti ghātāpekkhaṃ sāmiatthe bhummavacanaṃ, tenāha ‘‘tādisassa vacanassa ghāto’’ti. Attho dhammadesanāya hetu uppajjati ettha, dhammadesanādiko vā attho uppajjati etāyāti aṭṭhuppatti, paccuppannavatthu.
取其一,是指从说法和制戒这两件事里,取说法的那个因缘。或夜分,是就七日应作事前往、在外等到日出而言,不是就雨安居分而言,因为雨安居分另有别说。由此也应知道:在雨安居分的因缘下,也允许为了七日应作事而前往。不于任何,是指不因对任何功德有所期待而轻视。随后我们将受持戒,是就为了活命而显示寂静功德、活命失败而说的。将轻视,就是将会鄙视。巴利
Ekaṃ gahetvāti dhammadesanāsikkhāpadapaññattisaṅkhātesu dvīsu dhammadesanākāraṇaṃ gahetvā. Ratticchedo vāti sattāhakaraṇīyavasena gantvā bahi aruṇuṭṭhāpanavasena vutto, na vassacchedavasena tassa visuṃ vuccamānattā. Etena ca vassacchedapaccaye sattāhakaraṇīyena gamanaṃ anuññātanti veditabbaṃ. Na kismiñcīti kismiñci guṇe sambhāvanāvasena na maññanti. Pacchā sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhaheyyāmāti ājīvahetu santaguṇappakāsanena ājīvavipattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Atimaññissatīti avamaññissati.
17 “具寿”是亲爱语。先按高族和低族的通用说法讲了之后,又专门就高族来显示,所以说“重敬与顺从之语”。其中,具有顺从和依止,就是具顺从、具依止,意思是对具足重德者的敬语。这里“语”本身就是“名称”。“地味”是劫初时在水面上最先以地界生起的、像新鲜酥团一样、能在水中上浮而不沉没、极其柔软甘甜、厚达数万由旬的、称为味所欲的地汁。劫初之人因贪爱味道而取来吃,由于他们的业力,上方部分变得粗硬,下方则保持原来的样子;依靠它的力量,这大地连同山、海、林而位于下方水中,不沉没、不散坏,如浮在水面一样安稳而住,这就是地味,意思是“地精”。因此说“地味”等。具足是指具有甘甜之味,所以说“美味”。具足果实是指多果。“无蝇”说了之后,又说“无蝇团”,是显示连蝇团也没有。凡是依止大地的众生,我将把他们移到这里来——这里,人与非人、畜生、女人等,以手移动,为什么没有触犯不得触摸的过失呢?没有过失,为什么?因为“诸比丘,于神变境界,具神变者无犯”之语,所以世尊也没有显示不得触摸的过失,而说“众生甚至可能获得颠倒”,小村。大村是商镇。以步为单位是指以脚放置。巴利
17. ‘‘Āyasmāti piyavacanameta’’nti uccanīcajanasāmaññavasena vatvā puna uccajanāveṇikavaseneva dassento ‘‘garugāravasappatissādhivacana’’nti āha. Tattha saha patissayena nissayenāti sappatisso, sanissayo, tassa garuguṇayuttesu gāravavacananti attho. Idha pana vacanameva adhivacanaṃ. Pappaṭakojanti ādikappe udakūpari paṭhamaṃ pathavībhāvena sañjātaṃ navanītapiṇḍasadisaṃ udakepi uppilanasabhāvaṃ avilīyanakaṃ atisiniddhamadhuraṃ anekayojanasahassabahalaṃ rasātalasaṅkhātaṃ pathavojaṃ. Yaṃ ādikappikehi manussehi rasataṇhāya gahetvā bhuñjamānaṃ tesaṃ kammabalena uparibhāge kakkhaḷabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā heṭṭhā purimākāreneva ṭhitaṃ, yassa ca balena ayaṃ mahāpathavī sapabbatasamuddakānanā heṭṭhāudake animujjamānā avikiriyamānā kullupari viya niccalā tiṭṭhati, taṃ pathavīsāramaṇḍanti attho, tenāha pathavīmaṇḍotiādi. Sampannanti madhurarasena upetaṃ, tenāha ‘‘sādurasa’’nti. Upapannaphaloti bahuphalo. ‘‘Nimmakkhika’’nti vatvā puna ‘‘nimmakkhikaṇḍa’’nti makkhikaṇḍānampi abhāvaṃ dasseti. Ye pathavīnissitā pāṇā, te tattha saṅkāmessāmīti ettha manussāmanussatiracchānagatitthīnampi hatthasaṅkāmane kiṃ anāmāsadoso na hotīti? Na hoti, kasmā? ‘‘Anāpatti, bhikkhave, iddhimassa iddhivisaye’’ti (pārā. 159) vacanato, teneva bhagavāpi anāmāsadosaṃ adassetvā ‘‘vipallāsampi sattā paṭilabheyyu’’nti āha, khuddako gāmo. Mahanto sāpaṇo nigamo. Padavītihārenāti padanikkhepena.
律制立请求之论的解说巴利
Vinayapaññattiyācanakathāvaṇṇanā
18 “从律制的最初制定开始”这句话,是针对波罗夷等重罪学处以及其他学处,按照巴帝摩卡诵戒的次序,大多数都还没有制定这一点来说的,并不是说一切都完全没有制定。正因如此,长老才向世尊请求:“愿世尊为声闻弟子制定学处,诵巴帝摩卡”,他是连同诵巴帝摩卡一起请求制定学处的。因为在犍度中,早在阿难长老等人出家之前、罗睺罗贤者出家的时候,就已经可以看到制定好的学处:“诸比丘,没有得到父母允许的儿子,不应让他出家,如果让他出家,犯恶作罪。”就在这部注释书里,也因为提到了“自己煮饭……不合适”以及“没有造成夜分或雨安居的中断”,可以知道在此之前就已经有禁止自己煮饭等规定。这样一来,虽然已经有少数几条学处被制定,但那句话是针对尚未制定的波罗夷等而说的:“舍利弗,到现在为止,老师还没有为声闻弟子制定学处”,应当这样理解。从种种所缘退回来之后,心完全沉入、安住于单一所缘,这就叫“达到独一状态”,意思是达到了心的远离。“许久”是在表达究竟结合时的用法。巴利
18.Vinayapaññattiyāmūlato pabhutīti pārājikādigarukānaṃ, tadaññesañca sikkhāpadānaṃ pātimokkhuddesakkamena yebhuyyena apaññattataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na sabbena sabbaṃ apaññattatāya. Teneva thero bhagavantaṃ ‘‘sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeyya uddiseyya pātimokkha’’nti pātimokkhuddesena saha sikkhāpadapaññattiṃ yāci. Khandhake hi ānandattherādīnaṃ pabbajjato puretarameva rāhulabhaddassa pabbajjāya ‘‘na, bhikkhave, ananuññāto mātāpitūhi putto pabbājetabbo, yo pabbājeyya āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 105) paññattasikkhāpadaṃ dissati. Idheva aṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘sāmampi pacanaṃ…pe… na vaṭṭatī’’ti ca, ‘‘ratticchedo vassacchedo vā na kato’’ti ca vuttattā pubbeva sāmapākādipaṭikkhepo atthīti paññāyati. Evaṃ katipayasikkhāpadānaṃ paññattisabbhāvepi apaññattapārājikādike sandhāya ‘‘na tāva, sāriputta, satthā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetī’’ti vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Puthuttārammaṇato paṭinivattitvā sammadeva ekārammaṇe cittena līno paṭisallīno nāmāti āha ‘‘ekībhāvaṃ gatassā’’ti, cittavivekaṃ gatassāti attho. Ciranti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ.
所谓“十六种慧”,是指中部《随观经》的教说里提到的:“比丘们,舍利弗有大慧、广慧、悦慧、速慧、利慧、决断慧”,这六种慧,加上九次第定的慧和阿拉汉道的慧,这样一共十六种慧。那些声闻能在净居天出现的诸佛,只有他们才在世间广为人知,所以这里只举出毗婆尸等佛,不包括其他过去诸佛。因此在《阿吒那胝经》中,诸天也只取自己所知道的那几位佛,不取其他佛,应当这样理解。巴利
Soḷasavidhāya paññāyāti majjhimanikāye anupadasuttantadesanāyaṃ ‘‘mahāpañño, bhikkhave, sāriputto puthupañño hāsapañño javanapañño tikkhapañño nibbedhikapañño’’ti āgatā cha paññā ca navānupubbavihārasamāpattipaññā ca arahattamaggapaññā cāti evaṃ soḷasavidhena āgatāya paññāya. Yesaṃ buddhānaṃ sāvakā suddhāvāsesu sandissanti, teyeva loke pākaṭāti vipassīādayova idha uddhaṭā, na itare pubbabuddhā. Teneva āṭānāṭiyasutte (dī. ni. 3.275 ādayo) devāpi attano pākaṭānaṃ tesaññeva gahaṇaṃ akaṃsu, nāññesanti veditabbaṃ.
19 他们不操心,是因为没有事情可做,所以提不起劲,并不是因为懒惰,因此说“不是懒惰、不是不操心”等等。所谓“没有过失”,是指没有由身、语违犯所生起的过失。因为存在“不杀生、不取未给与之物”等(《经集》402)教诫学处,所以说“以七聚罪”等等。因为考虑到每六年的最后一天,所以说“一次一次”,这里依据这一点而用了属格。整个赡部洲的所有比丘僧团都举行了布萨,这是上下文之间的关联。巴利
19.Kilāsunoti appossukkā payojanābhāvena nirussāhā ahesuṃ, na ālasiyena, tenāha na ālasiyakilāsunotiādi. Niddosatāyāti kāyavacīvītikkamasamuṭṭhāpakadosābhāvā. Pāṇaṃ na hane na cādinnamādiyetiādinā (su. ni. 402) ovādasikkhāpadānaṃ vijjamānattā vuttaṃ sattāpattikkhandhavasenātiādi. Channaṃ channaṃ vassānaṃ osānadivasaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘sakiṃ saki’’nti vuttattā tadapekkhamettha sāmivacanaṃ. Sakalajambudīpe sabbopi bhikkhusaṅgho uposathaṃ akāsīti sambandho.
在“忍耐是最高的苦行”等语句中,被称为堪忍的忍耐,由于能烧尽由众生诸行所生起的不堪忍受的烦恼,所以名为最高的苦行。因为已从被称为“林”的渴爱中出离,涅槃是一切法中最殊胜、最上等的——诸佛这样说。由于没有前面所说的忍耐,杀生或砍打等,就是伤害他人;通过偷盗、邪淫等,以及妄语、两舌、粗恶语等来恼害他人,由于没有去除恶法,就不是出家人;由于没有止息恶法,就不是沙门——这是这段话的意思。以戒律仪防止一切恶法生起,以世间定和观修习善法、使之成就,以一切道与果清净自己的心、使心变得光明清净,这就是诸佛的教诫。不诽谤,就是不用言语诽谤任何人。不伤害,就是不用身体伤害任何人,并且在其余所说的波罗提木叉戒中防护自己。在饮食上知量,就是与活命清净、依止资具的戒相结合;以此为入手处,守护根门;以此为入手处,安住在称为边地坐卧处的阿兰若住处;以此为入手处,立足于称为四资具知足、乐于修习的大圣种;对于称为增上心的世间与出世间定,以令其生起的方式精进、专修,这就是诸佛的教诫。这是句义的连接。巴利
Khantīparamantiādīsu titikkhāsaṅkhātā khanti sattasaṅkhārehi nibbattāniṭṭhākhamanakilesatapanato paramaṃ tapo nāma. Vānasaṅkhātāya taṇhāya nikkhantattā nibbānaṃ sabbadhammehi paramaṃ uttamanti buddhā vadanti. Yathāvuttakhantiyā abhāvena pāṇavadhaṃ vā chedanatāḷanādiṃ vā karonto parūpaghātī parassaharaṇaparadārātikkamanādīhi musāpesuññapharusādīhi ca paraṃ viheṭhayanto ca bāhitapāpatāya abhāvena pabbajito vā samitapāpatāya abhāvena samaṇo vā na hotīti attho. Sīlasaṃvarena sabbapāpassa anuppādanaṃ lokiyasamādhivipassanāhi kusalassa upasampādanaṃ nipphādanaṃ sabbehi maggaphalehi attano cittassa parisodhanaṃ pabhassarabhāvakaraṇaṃ yaṃ, tametaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ anusiṭṭhi. Anupavādoti vācāya kassaci anupavadanaṃ. Anupaghātoti kāyena kassaci upaghātākaraṇaṃ vuttāvasese ca pātimokkhasaṅkhāte sīle attānaṃ saṃvaraṇaṃ. Bhattasmiṃ mattaññutāsaṅkhātaājīvapārisuddhipaccayasannissitasīlasamāyogo tammukhena indriyasaṃvaro pantasenāsanasaṅkhātaṃ araññavāsaṃ tammukhena pakāsite catupaccayasantosabhāvanārāmatāsaṅkhātamahāariyavaṃse patiṭṭhānañca adhicittasaṅkhāte lokiyalokuttarasamādhimhi taduppādanavasena āyogo anuyogo ca yaṃ, tametaṃ buddhānaṃ anusiṭṭhīti yojanā.
“直到教法终尽”这句话,是因为教令巴帝摩卡已经不存在才说的。而般涅槃之后,连教诫巴帝摩卡的诵出也不存在了,因为只有佛陀才会诵出它,声闻弟子不会诵出。“初成正觉时”是指从成道算起的二十年间;不过阿阇梨法护长老说:“在四十五年中的最初十五年,属于初成正觉时。”但从制定学处开始,就只诵出教令巴帝摩卡,这是就巴帝摩卡诵出次第已经圆满来说的,指的是制定学处的时期。“无因无缘”是依次从遮止因和缘的角度来遮止原因。“以此因”就是以此原因。“于不清净的众中”是指因为混有无惭无愧之人而不清净的众中,不只是佛陀在不清净的众中诵出巴帝摩卡不合适,声闻弟子也一样。不过,通过举罪、忆念等方式净化之后再令共住,这是声闻弟子的责任;佛陀则制定学处、教导布萨等仪轨之后就放下,不做举罪、忆念等事。正因如此,世尊在不清净的众中没有诵巴帝摩卡,整夜默然安坐。比丘们知道世尊的心意后,把不清净的人逐了出去。因此应当知道,声闻弟子如果明知众不清净还举行布萨等僧羯磨,除非是为了排除梵行的障碍,否则也是不合适的。巴利
‘‘Yāva sāsanapariyantā’’ti āṇāpātimokkhassa abhāvato vuttaṃ. Parinibbānato pana uddhaṃ ovādapātimokkhuddesopi nattheva, buddhā eva hi taṃ uddisanti, na sāvakā. Paṭhamabodhiyanti bodhito vīsativassaparicchinne kāle, ācariyadhammapālattherena pana ‘‘pañcacattālīsāya vassesu ādito pannarasa vassāni paṭhamabodhī’’ti vuttaṃ, sikkhāpadapaññattikaālato pana pabhuti āṇāpātimokkhameva uddisantīti idaṃ pātimokkhuddesakkameneva paripuṇṇaṃ katvā sikkhāpadapaññattikālaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhānaṃ anavakāsoti yathākkamaṃ hetupaccayapaṭikkhepavasena kāraṇapaṭikkhepo. Yanti yena kāraṇena. Aparisuddhāya parisāyāti alajjīpuggalehi vomissatāya asuddhāya parisāya, na kevalaṃ buddhānaññeva aparisuddhāya parisāya pātimokkhuddeso ayutto, atha kho sāvakānampi. Codanāsāraṇādivasena pana sodhetvā saṃvāsakaraṇaṃ sāvakānaññeva bhāro, buddhā pana sikkhāpadāni paññapetvā uposathādikaraṇavidhānaṃ sikkhāpetvā vissajjenti, codanāsāraṇādīni na karonti, teneva bhagavā asuddhāya parisāya pātimokkhaṃ anuddisitvā sakalarattiṃ tuṇhībhūto nisīdi. Bhikkhū ca bhagavato adhippāyaṃ ñatvā asuddhapuggalaṃ bahi nīhariṃsu. Tasmā sāvakānampi asuddhāya parisāya ñatvā uposathādisaṅghakammakaraṇaṃ brahmacariyantarāyakaraṇaṃ vinā na vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ.
“亲对声闻”是指诸佛在世时、于佛面前出家的那些最后声闻弟子。为了说明殊胜与超越之义,又再次取用“殊胜”一词,说:“或者按殊胜、极殊胜的财富家族等来说。”应当知道,“等”字包含了殊胜、中等、不殊胜等。那些末代声闻弟子使其隐没,这就是它们的关联。巴利
Sammukhasāvakānanti buddhānaṃ sammukhe dharamānakāle pabbajitānaṃ sabbantimānaṃ sāvakānaṃ. Uḷārātisayajotanatthaṃ ‘‘uḷāruḷārabhogādikulavasena vā’’ti puna uḷārasaddaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Ādi-saddena uḷāramajjhattaanuḷārādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Te pacchimā sāvakā antaradhāpesunti sambandho.
即使学处还没有制定,如果声闻弟子是同一种姓等,他们就不会像毁坏自己家族世代相传的经典那样毁坏世尊的教法。然而,因为学处没有制定,而这些比丘又不是同一种姓等,所以他们就使教法毁灭。为了说明这个意思,才说了“由于同名……因此互相恼害”等话。但在“久住品”中应当知道,即使声闻弟子有不同种姓等差别,由于学处制定的圆满,教法仍然能长久流传。如果这样,为什么一切佛陀不都制定学处呢?因为教法长久流传并不只是以制定学处为唯一原因,还要有未来受持法与律、能为声闻弟子所调伏的众生出现。所以,当这类众生出现时,诸佛就制定学处;没有出现时,就不制定。因此应当知道,圆满的制定本身就暗示了有应受调伏的众生出现,所以它被说为教法长久流传的原因。巴利文中有“千比丘僧……教诫”这一句,这里的“千”是限定数目的千数僧团,就像“千世界”等用法一样。应理解为“那千比丘僧”。因为“千”这个词是单数,所以说了“千比丘的”,而根据支分关系,又以复数说明“被教诫的”,应当这样理解。巴利
Apaññattepi sikkhāpade yadi sāvakā samānajātiādikā siyuṃ, attano kulānugataganthaṃ viya bhagavato vacanaṃ na nāseyyuṃ. Yasmā pana sikkhāpadañca na paññattaṃ, ime ca bhikkhū na samānajātiādikā, tasmā vināsesunti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ yasmā ekanāmā…pe… tasmā aññamaññaṃ viheṭhentātiādi vuttaṃ. Ciraṭṭhitikavāre pana sāvakānaṃ nānājaccādibhāve samānepi sikkhāpadapaññattiyā paripuṇṇatāya sāsanassa cirappavatti veditabbā. Yadi evaṃ kasmā sabbepi buddhā sikkhāpadāni na paññapentīti? Yasmā ca sāsanassa cirappavattiyā na kevalaṃ sikkhāpadapaññattiyeva hetu, atha kho āyatiṃ dhammavinayaṃ gahetvā sāvakehi vinetabbapuggalānaṃ sambhavopi, tasmā tesaṃ sambhave sati buddhā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapenti, nāsatīti paripuṇṇāpaññattiyeva veneyyasambhavassāpi sūcanato sāsanassa cirappavattiyā hetu vuttāti veditabbā. Pāḷiyaṃ sahassaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ…pe… ovadatīti ettha sahassasaṅkhyāparicchinno saṅgho sahasso sahassilokadhātūtiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.18) viya. Taṃ sahassaṃ bhikkhusaṅghanti yojanā. Sahassasaddassa ekavacanantatāya ‘‘bhikkhusahassassā’’ti vatvā avayavāpekkhāya ‘‘ovadiyamānāna’’nti bahuvacananiddeso katoti daṭṭhabbo.
“诸心不执取而解脱诸漏”这句话里,“诸漏”是表示行为主体的具格;“诸心”是复数主格;“解脱”是以行为对象为核心的词。所以,应当这样理解这里的含义:以作为行为主体的诸漏,不执取所缘,而使诸心得到解脱。因此说“他们之心”等。“由哪些漏”这里,“诸漏”同样是表示行为主体的具格;“解脱”是以行为对象为核心的词。“他们”指诸漏;“它们”指诸心,这是受事复数。“解脱”是以行为主体为核心的词,意思是“令解脱”。“不执取而解脱”的意思是:不以所缘执取那些心,诸漏就从那些心中成为已解脱的。或者,“诸漏”是表示分离的从格,“解脱”是以行为主体为核心的词。因此应当这样理解:不依渴爱等执取任何有为法,诸心便成为已解脱的。“依前文”是指顾念前面已说的“在某处可怖丛林”那段话,也就是“于彼前文”如此顾念,所以说“已说”等。“怖畏所作”是指由怖畏而作的造作、行为,即怖畏所作;为了说明“于彼怖畏所作中”的意思,所以说“于怖畏行为中”。“令怖畏者”就是令人怖畏者,也就是可怖者;它的状态本应说成“可怖性”,这里省略了“性”字,用另一种方式说明其义,所以说“或者”等。“多数众生”是在说明“大多数”这个词的含义。由此也说明:“任何”这个词,也应按遍指的方式理解为“凡有进入者”的逐一之义;因为在凡进入者之中,多数者之义才得以成立。巴利
Anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṃsūti ettha āsavehīti kattuatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Cittānīti paccattabahuvacanaṃ. Vimucciṃsūti kammasādhanaṃ. Tasmā āsavehi kattubhūtehi anupādāya ārammaṇakaraṇavasena aggahetvā cittāni vimocitānīti evamettha attho gahetabboti āha tesañhi cittānītiādi. Yehi āsavehīti etthāpi kattuatthe eva karaṇavacanaṃ. Vimucciṃsūti kammasādhanaṃ. Teti āsavā. Tānīti cittāni, upayogabahuvacanañcetaṃ. Vimucciṃsūti kattusādhanaṃ, vimocesunti attho. Aggahetvā vimucciṃsūti ārammaṇavasena tāni cittāni aggahetvā āsavā tehi cittehi muttavanto ahesunti attho. Atha vā āsavehīti nissakkavacanaṃ, vimucciṃsūti kattusādhanaṃ. Tasmā kañci saṅkhatadhammaṃ taṇhādivasena anupādiyitvā cittāni vimuttavantāni ahesunti attho gahetabbo. Purimavacanāpekkhanti aññatarasmiṃ bhiṃsanake vanasaṇḍeti vuttavacanassa apekkhanaṃ tasmiṃ purimavacaneti evaṃ apekkhananti attho, tenāha yaṃ vuttantiādi. Bhiṃsanassa bhayassa kataṃ karaṇaṃ kiriyā bhiṃsanakataṃ, tasmiṃ bhiṃsanakiriyāyāti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhiṃsanakiriyāyā’’ti. Bhiṃsayatīti bhiṃsano, sova bhiṃsanako, tassa bhāvo ‘‘bhiṃsanakatta’’nti vattabbe ta-kārassa lopaṃ katvā vuttanti pakārantarena atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Bahutarānaṃ sattānaṃ vāti yebhuyyenāti padassa atthadassanaṃ. Tena ca yo kocīti padassāpi yo yo pavisatīti vicchāvasena nānatthena attho gahetabboti dasseti, yo yo pavisati, tesu bahutarānanti atthasambhavato.
“结语”是指在已经说明的义理中,对前面所说义理的归纳总结。这里结语的次第是这样的:舍利弗,对于毗婆尸等三位佛陀来说,由于他们自己般涅槃之后,已经没有需要依教法调伏的众生,所以他们为众生详细制定学处时感到疲倦、想少做事;但对于那些具足亲依止缘、应当被调伏的人,他们以心观心之后,甚至走到令人恐惧的密林中去教导,为了让他们生起道与果而说法时,却毫不疲倦、精勤努力,而不是详细地说法与制戒。这里“依人双”是指人之双的运行时间,依其力,即依人之力;“最后一切”是指在般涅槃日出家者,如须跋陀罗之类。舍利弗,这就是原巴利
Nigamananti pakate atthe yathāvuttassa atthassa upasaṃhāro. Ayañhettha nigamanakkamo – yā hi, sāriputta, vipassīādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ buddhānaṃ attano parinibbānato upari pariyattivasena vinetabbānaṃ puggalānaṃ abhāvena tesaṃ atthāya vitthārato sikkhāpadapaññattiyaṃ kilāsutā appossukkatā, yā ca upanissayasampannānaṃ veneyyānaṃ cetasā ceto paricca bhiṃsanakavanasaṇḍepi gantvā ovadantānaṃ tesaṃ maggaphaluppādanatthāya dhammadesanāya eva akilāsutā saussāhatā, na vitthārato dhammavinayadesanāya, ayaṃ kho, sāriputta, hetu, ayaṃ paccayo, yena vipassīādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ buddhānaṃ brahmacariyaṃ na ciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosīti. Purisayugavasenāti purisānaṃ yugaṃ pavattikālo, tassa vasena, purisavasenāti attho. Sabbapacchimakoti parinibbānadivase pabbajito subhaddasadiso. Satasahassaṃ saṭṭhimattāni ca vassasahassānīti idaṃ bhagavato jātito paṭṭhāya vuttaṃ, bodhito paṭṭhāya pana gaṇiyamānaṃ ūnaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dveyevāti dharamāne bhagavati ekaṃ, parinibbute ekanti dve eva purisayugāni.
20-1 “不能”是指达不到。“有什么关联”是指:这和前面说的话有什么联系?“已说”是指已经请求的意思。“在他们当中”是指在违犯的法里面。“他们”是指现世等诸漏。“他们”是指违犯的法。“亲族圈”是因为祖父、父亲、儿子等一代代轮转,所以叫亲族圈。“属于世间利养”是指属于世间,因为被烦恼所接触,所以叫属于世间利养。“仅以出家略说”是指通过授予十学处等出家入门。“此”是指不做淫行等。“力”是指在制定学处上的能力。“自肤”是指自己原本清净的肤色、本色,或者美好的肤色。“其余”是指显示其余词句的连接方式。现在为了显示意义上的连接,而说“此即此处”等。其中,“或”字表示确定;“实”字表示众所周知,意思是“此即是此处”。接着显示“时师”这个词的含义,说“那时导师”。“令生长”是指在破裂的地方,让凹陷的肉平整地长起来。“于自己的师位”是指在自己作为老师的地位上,或者指在老师的事业上。巴利
20-1.Asambhuṇantenāti apāpuṇantena. Ko anusandhīti purimakathāya imassa ko sambandhoti attho. Yaṃ vuttanti yaṃ yācitanti attho. Yesūti vītikkamadhammesu. Nesanti diṭṭhadhammikādiāsavānaṃ. Teti vītikkamadhammā. Ñātiyeva pitāmahapituputtādivasena parivaṭṭanato parivaṭṭoti ñātiparivaṭṭo. Lokāmisabhūtanti lokapariyāpannaṃ hutvā kilesehi āmasitabbato lokāmisabhūtaṃ. Pabbajjāsaṅkhepenevāti dasasikkhāpadadānādipabbajjāmukhena. Etanti methunādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ. Thāmanti sikkhāpadapaññāpanasāmatthiyaṃ. Sañchavinti sukkacchaviṃ pakaticchaviṃ, sundaracchaviṃ vā. Sesanti sesapadayojanadassanaṃ. Idāni atthayojanaṃ dassento āha ayaṃ vā hetthātiādi. Tattha vā-saddo avadhāraṇe. Hi-saddo pasiddhiyaṃ, ayameva hetthāti attho. Atha satthāti padassa atthaṃ dasseti ‘‘tadā satthā’’ti. Ropetvāti phālitaṭṭhāne ninnaṃ maṃsaṃ samaṃ vaḍḍhetvā. Sake ācariyaketi attano ācariyabhāve, ācariyakamme vā.
“广大”是指数量众多。“不如理地浮出”是指以不正当的方法执取,也就是颠倒地认知。“以味混味”是指把没有过失的本性和有过失的本性混在一起。“非法非律”是指令法高涨、令律高涨,也就是使法与律走向毁灭。“于此义”是指在这件僧团事务上。“光耀”是指有照耀的本性。“如是名如是姓”是指这位尊者具备入流者的名与姓,接着就是通常所说的“这称为入流者”。“不堕处法”中,“法”这个词表示自性,它的意思就是能使人堕入恶趣的邪见等不善法,因此说“诸法”等。现在为了仅以自性方式显示其义,说了“或堕处”等。“决定者”是指于七有之内决定般涅槃者。其因由,说“以正觉为彼岸”。巴利
Vipulabhāvenāti bahubhāvena. Ayoniso ummujjamānāti anupāyena abhinivisamānā, viparītato jānamānāti attho. Rasena rasaṃ saṃsanditvāti anavajjasabhāvena sāvajjasabhāvaṃ sammissetvā. Uddhammaṃ ubbinayanti uggatadhammaṃ uggatavinayañca, yathā dhammo ca vinayo ca vinassissati, evaṃ katvāti attho. Imasmiṃ attheti imasmiṃ saṅghādhikāre. Pabhassaroti pabhāsanasīlo. Evaṃnāmo evaṃgottoti soyamāyasmā sotāpannotināmagottena samannāgato, ayaṃ vuccati sotāpannoti pakatena sambandho. Avinipātadhammoti ettha dhamma-saddo sabhāvavācī, so ca atthato apāyesu khipanako diṭṭhiādiakusaladhammo evāti āha ‘‘ye dhammā’’tiādi. Idāni sabhāvavaseneva atthaṃ dassetuṃ vinipatanaṃ vātiādi vuttaṃ. Niyatoti sattabhavabbhantare niyatakkhandhaparinibbāno. Tassa kāraṇamāha ‘‘sambodhiparāyaṇo’’ti.
22 随法性,是指随顺出世间法的自性。给予自恣的许可,是指以“我们在来月的满月日举行自恣”这种方式给予同意,意思就是把自恣推迟;由此说明,以某种因缘推迟自恣是可以的。在末伽始罗月第一天,这是按太阴月来说的,意思是在后迦提月满月的第二天,也就是月出那天。在颇沙月第一天,这里也是同样的道理。这只是一个示例,因为所化众生还未成熟,所以在颇沙月之后,也可以在那里住上一、二、三乃至四个月,再用剩下的月份完成游化。在一万世界,这是就天众和梵天众而说的。而人类只有在这个世界才能获得觉悟。在其他世界,为了让那里的人类对这个世界的投生产生向往,诸佛也会观察无量世界,然后作出与那情况相应的教诫神通。巴利
22.Anudhammatāti lokuttaradhammānugato sabhāvo. Pavāraṇāsaṅgahaṃ datvāti ‘‘āgāminiyā puṇṇamiyā pavāressāmā’’ti anumatidānavasena datvā, pavāraṇaṃ ukkaḍḍhitvāti attho, etena nayena kenaci paccayena pavāraṇukkaḍḍhanaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpitaṃ hoti. Māgasirassa paṭhamadivaseti candamāsavasena vuttaṃ, aparakattikapuṇṇamāya anantare pāṭipadadivaseti attho. Phussamāsassa paṭhamadivaseti etthāpi eseva nayo. Idañca nidassanamattaṃ veneyyānaṃ aparipākaṃ paṭicca phussamāsato parañca ekadviticatumāsampi tattheva vasitvā sesamāsehi cārikāya pariyosāpanato. Dasasahassacakkavāḷeti idaṃ devabrahmānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Manussā pana imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe bodhaneyyā honti. Itaracakkavāḷesu pana manussānaṃ imasmiṃ cakkavāḷe uppattiyā chanduppādanatthaṃ anantampi cakkavāḷaṃ oloketvā tadanuguṇānusāsanī pāṭihāriyaṃ karontiyeva.
这里“来”这个字,和“他来了”里的“来”意思相同,所以说“来吧,我们走”,也就是“来,我们去吧”。所谓“如金液所染”,意思是像熔化的金水那样呈现金色,也就是金色的意思。在巴利圣典中,“我们被邀请”等句里,应这样连接理解:“我们被邀请,已住雨安居”,以及“我们被邀请,已住雨安居”这一状态。巴利
Āyāmāti ettha ā-saddo āgacchāti iminā samānatthoti āha ‘‘āgaccha yāmā’’ti, ehi gacchāmāti attho. Suvaṇṇarasapiñjarāhīti vilīnasuvaṇṇajalaṃ viya piñjarāhi suvaṇṇavaṇṇāhīti attho. Pāḷiyaṃ nimantitamhātiādīsu ‘‘nimantitā vassaṃvutthā amhā’’ti ca, ‘‘nimantitā vassaṃvutthā atthā’’ti ca sambandho.
“他们将施与的物类”,意思是“无论什么”。“我们没有”,是说我们确实没有;或者,这是对“没有”这个词的解释,即不存在。“在这里”,指在居家生活中。“那”,指那个原因,或者应做的事。“从何”,指从哪个原因。“以何”,指以那个原因,或以那件事。在第二种义解中,“在这里”是对“在这个”的解释,即在这三个月期间内。“那”,指那份应施之物。巴利
Yanti deyyadhammajātaṃ, yaṃ kiñcīti attho. No natthīti amhākaṃ natthi, noti vā etassa vivaraṇaṃ natthīti. Etthāti gharāvāse. Tanti taṃ kāraṇaṃ, kiccaṃ vā. Kutoti katarahetuto. Yanti yena kāraṇena, kiccena vā. Dutiye atthavikappe etthāti imassa vivaraṇaṃ imasmiṃ temāsabbhantareti. Tanti taṃ deyyadhammaṃ.
其中“于善”是指善法。通过使其达到锐利、明净的状态来激励之后。使降下:是指让未来能成为习气分法的法宝之雨降下之后。某一天:是指在某一天。巴利
Tatthacāti kusale. Tikkhavisadabhāvāpādanena samuttejetvā. Vassetvāti āyatiṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ dhammaratanavassaṃ otāretvā. Yaṃ divasanti yasmiṃ divase.
23 “Pattuṇṇapattapaṭe cā”说的是绢布和中国布。“Tumbāni”指的是皮制的油容器。“Anubandhitvā”意思是做了跟随。“Abhiranta”这个词在这里是“喜好”的同义词,所以注释说“随其所欲”等等。“Soreyya”等,是指作为大游行路线的Soreyya城等地。“Payāgapatiṭṭhāna”既是恒河某一处特定渡口的名字,也是那附近村庄的名字。“Samantapāsādikāya”意思是:从四面八方、以一切方式让人生起净信,所以叫“Samantapāsādikā”,指的就是它。巴利
23.Pattuṇṇapattapaṭe cāti pattuṇṇapaṭe cīnapaṭe ca. Tumbānīti cammamayatelabhājanāni. Anubandhitvāti anupagamanaṃ katvā. Abhiranta-saddo idha abhirucipariyāyoti āha ‘‘yathājjhāsaya’’ntiādi. Soreyyādīni mahāmaṇḍalacārikāya maggabhūtāni soreyyanagarādīni. Payāgapatiṭṭhānanti gaṅgāya ekassa titthavisesassāpi, taṃsamīpe gāmassāpi nāmaṃ. Samantapāsādikāyāti samantato sabbaso pasādaṃ janetīti samantapāsādikā, tassā.
不过,为了详细说明“从各方面”指的是哪些方式,才说了“此中”等话。其中,先前所说的《一切善见》注释,就在那《一切善见》里,针对它“普皆善净”的性质,接下来要说的这首偈颂就是用来连接说明的。应当知道,这是按外因缘、内因缘、学处因缘来显示因缘的分类。也有人称之为“显示上座部主张、显示事由分类”,也可以说成“显示学处当前事由的分类”。而所谓“学处因缘”,应当理解为毗舍离等地,也就是制定学处的原因所在的具体地点。“此处”指的就是在《一切善见》中。“Sampassataṃ viññūnaṃ”是关联语,因此应当连接为:这部《一切善见》正是在有智慧的人共同所见之中如此流传的。巴利
Ye pana pakāre sandhāya ‘‘samantato’’ti vuccati, te pakāre vitthāretvā dassetuṃ tatridantiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘samantapāsādikā’’ti yā saṃvaṇṇanā vuttā, tatra tassaṃ samantapāsādikāyaṃ samantapasādikabhāve idaṃ vakkhamānagāthāvacanaṃ hotīti yojanā. Bāhiranidānaabbhantaranidānasikkhāpadanidānānaṃ vasena nidānappabhedadīpanaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Theravādappakāsanaṃ vatthuppabhedadīpana’’ntipi vadanti. ‘‘Sikkhāpadānaṃ paccuppannavatthuppabhedadīpana’’ntipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Sikkhāpadanidānanti pana vesālīādi sikkhāpadapaññattiyā kāraṇabhūtadesaviseso veditabbo. Etthāti samantapāsādikāya. Sampassataṃ viññūnanti sambandho, tasmā ayaṃ samantapāsādikātveva pavattāti yojetabbā.